Ford S-Max 2015 Owner's Manual

control on the steering wheel. See

Switch the ignition on using an admin key

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:

Settings

Message Action and Description

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Clear MyKey

Press the OK button.

Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.

All MyKeys

Cleared

Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

MyKey™

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM

STATUS

You can find information on programmed

MyKey(s) using the information display

Information Displays (page 87).

To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:

Settings

MyKey

Message

Press the OK button.

Description

Select one of the following:

MyKey Dist.

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a

MyKey.

{0} MyKeys

{0} Admin Keys

Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.

Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional

MyKey has been programmed.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

MyKey™

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE

START SYSTEMS

MyKey is not compatible with non

Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

Condition

I cannot create a MyKey.

I cannot program the configurable settings.

I cannot clear the MyKeys.

I lost the only admin key.

Potential Causes

• The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.

• The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at least one admin key).

• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup

position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine

(page 144).

• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.

• The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.

•

No MyKeys are created. See Creating a

MyKey (page 38).

• The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.

•

No MyKeys are created. See Creating a

MyKey (page 38).

Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

MyKey™

I lost a key.

Condition Potential Causes

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft

System (page 51).

MyKey distances do not accumulate.

• The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.

• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.

• The key system has been reset.

No MyKey functions with the keyless entry transmitter.

• An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.

•

No MyKeys are created. See Creating a

MyKey (page 38).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Note: Check your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.

Note: Do not leave your keys in your vehicle.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels.

Unlock.

Lock.

Door Lock Indicator

An LED on each door window trim illuminates when you lock the door. It remains on for up to 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off.

Door Lock Switch Inhibitor

When you electronically lock your vehicle, the power door lock switch will no longer operate after 20 seconds. You must unlock your vehicle with the remote control, or switch the ignition on to restore function to these switches. You can switch this

feature on or off in the information display.

See Information Displays (page 87).

Remote Control

You can use the remote control at any time when the ignition is off.

Unlocking the Doors

Press the button to unlock all doors. The direction indicators will flash.

Note: The driver door can be unlocked with the key if the remote control is not functioning.

Note: When you leave your vehicle unattended for several weeks, the remote control turns off. Your vehicle must be unlocked and the engine started using the key. Unlocking and starting your vehicle once enables the remote control.

Reprogramming the Unlocking

Function

You can reprogram the unlocking function so that only the driver door is unlocked.

See Remote Control (page 33).

Locking the Doors

Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators will flash.

Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles that have an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the direction indicators will not flash.

Double Locking the Doors

WARNING

Do not use double locking when passengers or animals are inside your vehicle. The doors cannot be unlocked or opened from the inside when double locked.

Double locking is a theft protection feature that prevents someone from opening the doors from the inside. It will only operate if all of the doors are fully closed.

Press the button twice within three seconds.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

Automatic Relocking

The doors automatically relock if you do not open a door within 45 seconds of unlocking the doors with the remote control. The door locks and the alarm return to their previous state.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

From Inside

Use the power door lock control located on the driver and front passenger door panels.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade

Locking with the Key Blade

Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle.

Double Locking with the Key Blade

Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle twice within three seconds.

Unlocking with the Key Blade

Turn the top of the key toward the rear of your vehicle.

Note: If the child safety locks are on and you pull the interior door handle, you will only switch off the emergency locking, not the child safety lock. You can only open the doors using the exterior door handle.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Individually with the Key Blade

Locking

If the central locking function fails to operate, lock the doors individually using the key in the position shown.

Left-Hand Side

Turn clockwise to lock.

Right-Hand Side

Turn counterclockwise to lock.

Unlocking

If the central locking function fails to operate, unlock the driver door and then unlock all other doors individually by pulling the interior door handles.

Note: If the doors have been unlocked using this method, the doors must be locked individually until the central locking function has been repaired.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

MANUAL LIFTGATE

WARNINGS

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.

Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components.

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components.

Opening the Liftgate

Manually

Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, and then pull on the outside handle.

With the Remote Control

Press the button twice within three seconds.

Closing the Liftgate

A handle is located inside the liftgate to help with closing.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

POWER LIFTGATE

(If Equipped)

WARNINGS

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a safety belt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.

Keep keys out of reach of children.

Do not allow children to operate or play near an open or moving power liftgate. You should supervise the operation of the power liftgate at all times.

Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate before operating or moving the vehicle, especially in an enclosure, like a garage or a parking structure. You could damage the liftgate or its components.

Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the spoiler, glass or liftgate.

This could damage the liftgate and its components.

The liftgate only operates with the transmission in park (P).

One warning tone sounds as the liftgate begins to power close. Three short chimes indicate a problem with the open or close request, caused by:

• The ignition is on and the transmission is not in park (P).

• The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage.

• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph

(5 km/h).

If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully opened, this indicates there may be excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible gas strut failure. A repetitive chime sounds and the liftgate closes under control. Remove any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to close after opening, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate

WARNING

Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components.

From the Instrument Panel

Press the button on the instrument panel.

With the Remote Control

Press the button twice within three seconds.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

With the Outside Control Button

Opening the Liftgate

Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock control.

If a passive key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when you press the liftgate release button.

2. Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.

Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction. Manually interfering with the liftgate motion may also replicate a gas strut failure.

Closing the Liftgate

WARNING

Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch.

Press and release the button.

Stopping the Liftgate Movement

You can stop the liftgate movement by doing any of the following:

• Pressing the liftgate control button.

• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote control twice.

• Pressing the liftgate button on the instrument panel.

• Pressing the exterior liftgate release button.

• Activating the obstacle detection feature.

Setting the Liftgate Open Height

Open the liftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing the control button on the liftgate when it reaches the desired height.

Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving, you can also manually move it to the desired height.

3. Press and hold the liftgate control button on the liftgate until you hear a chime, indicating programming is complete.

Note: You can only use the liftgate control button to program the height.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

Note: You cannot program the height if the liftgate position is too low.

The new open liftgate height is recalled when the power liftgate is opened. To change the programmed height, repeat the above procedure. Once you open the power liftgate, you can manually move it to a different height.

Note: The system recalls the new programmed height until you reprogram it, even if you disconnect the battery.

When operating the power liftgate after you have programmed a lower height than full-open, you can fully open the liftgate by manually pushing it upward to the maximum open position.

Obstacle Detection

When Closing

The system stops when it detects an obstacle. Two short tones sound and the system reverses to open. Once you remove the obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.

Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection. To prevent this, let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle.

Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving.

When Opening

The system stops when it detects an obstacle and two short tones sound. Once you remove the obstacle, you can continue to operate the liftgate.

KEYLESS ENTRY

General Information

The system will not function if:

• Your vehicle battery has no charge.

• The passive key frequencies are jammed.

• The passive key battery has no charge.

Note: If the system does not function, you will need to use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle.

The system allows you to operate your vehicle without the use of a key or remote control.

Passive locking and unlocking requires a valid passive key to be located within one of the three external detection ranges.

These are located approximately 3.3 ft

(1 m) from the front door handles and the liftgate.

Note: The system may not function if the passive key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone.

Passive Key

Your vehicle can be locked and unlocked with the passive key. You can use the

passive key as a remote control. See

Locking and Unlocking (page 43).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

Locking Your Vehicle

Locking sensors are located on each of the front doors.

For central locking and to arm the alarm, touch a locking sensor once.

For double locking and to arm the alarm, touch a locking sensor twice within three seconds.

Note: Your vehicle does not automatically lock. If you do not touch a locking sensor your vehicle will remain unlocked.

Note: When locking your vehicle, do not grip the door handle.

Note: Keep the door handle surface clean to make sure the system operates correctly.

Note: Your vehicle will remain locked for approximately three seconds. When the delay period is over, you can open the doors again, provided the passive key is within the respective detection range.

Two short flashes of the direction indicators confirms that all the doors and the liftgate have been locked and that the alarm has been armed.

Liftgate

Note: The liftgate cannot be closed and will reopen if the passive key is located inside the luggage compartment with the doors locked.

Note: If a second valid passive key is located within the liftgate detection range, the liftgate can be closed.

Unlocking Your Vehicle

One long flash of the direction indicators confirms that all the doors and the liftgate have been unlocked and that the alarm has been disarmed.

Note: When your vehicle remains locked for longer than three days, the system will enter an energy-saving mode. This is to prevent the vehicle battery running out of charge. When your vehicle is unlocked while in this mode, the reaction time of the system may be a little longer than normal. To exit the energy-saving mode, unlock your vehicle.

Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door.

Unlocking Only the Driver Door

You can program the system so that only

the driver door is unlocked. See Remote

Control (page 33).

If the unlocking function is reprogrammed so that only the driver door is unlocked the following will occur:

• If the driver door is the first door opened, all the other doors will remain locked. All the other doors can be unlocked from inside your vehicle by pressing the unlock button. The other doors can be unlocked individually by pulling the interior door handle on the respective door.

• If the front passenger door is the first door opened, all the doors will be unlocked.

Disabled Passive Keys

Any keys left inside your vehicle interior when it is locked will be disabled.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Locks

You cannot use a disabled key to switch the ignition on or start the engine.

You must enable all passive keys again in order to use them.

To enable all your passive keys, unlock your vehicle using a passive key that has not been disabled or the remote control unlocking function.

All passive keys will then be enabled if you switch the ignition on or you start your vehicle with a valid key.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade

Slide the release on the back of the remote control and pivot the cover off to access

the key blade. See Remote Control (page

33).

Note: Only the driver door handle has a lock cylinder.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Security

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT

SYSTEM

Principle of Operation

The system prevents someone from starting the engine with an incorrectly coded key.

Note: Do not leave correctly coded keys in the vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

Coded Keys

If you lose a key, you can obtain a replacement from an authorized dealer. If possible, provide them with the key number from the tag provided with the original keys. You can also obtain extra keys from an authorized dealer.

Note: Have all of your remaining keys erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have replacement keys coded together with recoding your remaining keys. See an authorized dealer for further information.

Note: Do not shield your keys with metal objects. This may prevent the receiver from recognizing a coded key.

Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engine immobilizer will arm automatically after a short time.

Disarming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engine immobilizer will disarm automatically if a correctly coded key is used.

If you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM -

VEHICLES WITH: PERIMETER

ALARM

The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorized access to your vehicle through the doors and the hood. It also protects the audio unit.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will sound and the hazard warning flasher will flash.

Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm

To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See

Locks (page 43).

Disarming the Alarm

Vehicles Without Keyless Entry

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching your vehicle on with a correctly coded key or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

Vehicles With Keyless Entry

Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door for

keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 48).

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching your vehicle on or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Security

ANTI-THEFT ALARM -

VEHICLES WITH: INTERIOR

SENSOR

Alarm System

WARNING

Do not arm the alarm with full guard if passengers, animals or other moving objects are inside your vehicle.

Perimeter Alarm

The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorized access to your vehicle through the doors and the hood. It also protects the audio unit.

Interior Sensors

The interior lamp unit sensors are located in the overhead console.

Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unit sensors.

The sensors act as a deterrent against unauthorized intrusion by sensing any movement inside your vehicle.

Triggering the Alarm

Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any of the following ways:

• If someone opens a door, the liftgate or the hood without a valid key or remote control.

• If someone removes the audio unit or navigation system.

• If you switch your vehicle on without a correctly coded key.

• If the interior sensors detect movement within your vehicle.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will sound for 30 seconds and the hazard warning flasher will flash for five minutes.

Any further attempts to perform one of the above will trigger the alarm again.

Full and Reduced Guard

Full Guard

Full guard is the standard setting.

In full guard, the interior sensors are on when you arm the alarm.

Reduced Guard

In reduced guard, the interior sensors are off when you arm the alarm.

Selecting Full or Reduced Guard

You can select full or reduced guard using

the information display. See General

To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See

Ask on Exit (If Equipped)

You can set the information display to ask you each time which level of guard you wish to set.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Security

Using the information display controls, scroll to:

Settings

Vehicle settings

Alarm

Message Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Ask on exit Press the OK button.

Reduced guard Appears in the information display each time you switch your vehicle off.

If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the

OK button when this message appears.

If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehicle without pressing the OK button.

Note: Selecting reduced guard does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It sets it to reduced guard only for the current locking cycle.

Arming the Alarm

Locks (page 43).

Disarming the Alarm

Vehicles Without Keyless Entry

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching your vehicle on with a correctly coded key or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

Vehicles with Keyless Entry

Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door for

keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 48).

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching your vehicle on or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM -

VEHICLES WITH: INTEGRAL

BATTERY

Alarm System

WARNING

Do not arm the alarm with full guard if passengers, animals or other moving objects are inside your vehicle.

Perimeter Alarm

The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorized access to your vehicle through the doors and the hood.

Interior Sensors

The interior lamp unit sensors are located in the overhead console.

Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unit sensors.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Security

The sensors act as a deterrent against unauthorized access by sensing any movement within your vehicle.

Battery Back-up Sounder

The battery back-up sounder is an additional alarm system, which sounds a siren if your vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder is disconnected. When you lock your vehicle the system is armed.

The sounder has its own battery and will sound an alarm siren even if someone disconnects your vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself.

Triggering the Alarm

Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any of the following ways:

• If someone opens a door, the liftgate or the hood without a valid key or remote control.

• If someone removes the audio or navigation system.

• If you switch your vehicle on without a correctly coded key.

• If the interior sensors detect movement within your vehicle.

• On vehicles with a battery back-up sounder, if someone disconnects your vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will sound for 30 seconds and the hazard warning flasher will flash for five minutes.

Any further attempts to perform one of the above sounds the alarm again.

Full and Reduced Guard

Full Guard

Full guard is the standard setting.

In full guard, the interior sensors are on when you arm the alarm.

Reduced Guard

In reduced guard, the interior sensors are off when you arm the alarm.

Selecting Full or Reduced Guard

You can select full or reduced guard using

the information display. See General

To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See

Ask on Exit (If Equipped)

You can set the information display to ask you each time which level of guard you wish to set.

Using the information display controls, scroll to:

Message

Settings

Vehicle settings

Alarm

Ask on exit

Reduced

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Appears in the information display each time you switch your vehicle off.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Security

Message Action and Description

If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the

OK button when this message appears.

If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehicle without pressing the OK button.

Note: Selecting reduced guard does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It sets it to reduced guard only for the current locking cycle.

Arming the Alarm

Locks (page 43).

Disarming the Alarm

Vehicles Without Keyless Entry

Perimeter Alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching your vehicle on with a correctly coded key or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

Category One Alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching your vehicle on with a correctly coded key within

12 seconds or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

Vehicles with Keyless Entry

Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door for

keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 48).

Perimeter Alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching your vehicle on or unlocking the doors with the remote control.

Category One Alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching your vehicle on within 12 seconds or unlocking the doors or the liftgate with the remote control.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:

MANUAL ADJUSTABLE

STEERING COLUMN

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct

Position (page 125).

ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:

POWER ADJUSTABLE

STEERING COLUMN

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct

Position (page 125).

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving.

Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position.

To adjust:

• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the control.

• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the control.

3. Lock the steering column.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Steering Wheel

End of Travel Position

The steering column sets a stopping position just short of the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering column. A new stopping position sets if the steering column encounters an object when tilting or telescoping.

To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:

Confirm there is nothing obstructing the motion of the steering column.

2. Press and hold the steering column control until the steering column stops moving.

3. Press the steering column control again. The steering column may begin to move again.

4. When the steering column stops, continue holding the control for an additional few seconds.

5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.

A new stopping position is set. The next time you tilt or telescope the steering column, it will stop just short of the end of the column position.

Memory Feature

You can save and recall the steering

column position with the memory function.

See Memory Function (page 129).

Note: Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall cancels the operation.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature

When you switch the ignition off, the steering column will move to allow extra room to exit your vehicle. The column will return to the previous setting when you switch the ignition on. You can enable or disable this feature in the information

display. See Information Displays (page

87).

AUDIO CONTROL

Select the required source on the audio unit.

Operate the following functions with the control:

Volume up.

Volume down.

Mute.

Media.

Seek down or previous.

Seek up or next.

MEDIA

Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio sources.

Seek, Next or Previous

Press the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset.

• play the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band.

• seek through a track.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Steering Wheel

VOICE CONTROL

(If Equipped)

Type 2

Press the button to select or deselect voice

control. See SYNC™ 2 (page 344).

CRUISE CONTROL

Type 1

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control

(page 190). See Speed Limiter (page 196).

INFORMATION DISPLAY

CONTROL

See Using Cruise Control

(page 189). See

Speed Limiter (page 196).

See Information Displays (page 87).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Steering Wheel

Information Display Control

Features

This control functions the same as the

center control on the faceplate. See Audio

Unit (page 295).

Use this control to adjust the right side of the information display. Navigate through the screen and press OK to select.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL

(If

Equipped)

See SYNC™ 2 (page 344).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wipers and Washers

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers and vehicle power off before using an automatic car wash.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the

wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper

Blades (page 251). If that does not resolve

the issue, install new wiper blades. See

Changing the Wiper Blades (page 252).

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.

Intermittent Wipe

Single wipe.

Intermittent wipe.

Normal wipe.

High-speed wipe.

Note: Move to position O marked on the wiper lever to switch off.

Short-wipe interval.

Intermittent wipe.

Long-wipe interval.

Push the wiper lever up to switch the wipers on, and then use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers

(If Equipped)

When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases.

AUTOWIPERS

(If Equipped)

Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers and ignition off before using an automatic car wash.

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.

Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wipers and Washers

Note: During wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur.

In these conditions, you can do the following:

• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield.

• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.

• Switch autowipers off.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.

The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat.

High sensitivity

C Low sensitivity

Note: Some autowiper levers may include a letter "A" within the icon.

Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in the area around the interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount of moisture on the windshield and automatically turns the wipers on. It will adjust the wiper speed by the amount of moisture that the sensor detects on the windshield.

Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield.

To operate the washers and spray the windshield, pull the lever toward you.

A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid. This feature can be switched on or

off in the information display. See (page

87).

Front Camera Washer

(If Equipped)

Operating the windshield washer will also operate the front camera washer.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHERS

Rear Window Wiper

Note: Make sure you switch the rear window wiper and ignition off before using an automatic car wash.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wipers and Washers

Intermittent wipe.

Low speed wipe.

Off.

Press the top of the button to switch intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the button again to switch low speed wipe on.

Press the bottom of the button to switch the rear window wiper off.

When you switch on the front wipers and move the gearshift lever to reverse (R), rear intermittent wipe automatically turns on.

Rear Window Washer

HEADLAMP WASHERS

When the headlamps are on, the headlamp washers will operate with the windshield washers.

Note: The headlamp washers will not operate every time you use the windshield washers. This is to prevent the washer fluid reservoir from emptying quickly.

Push the lever away from you to operate the rear window washer. When you release the lever, wiping continues for a short period of time.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Lighting

GENERAL INFORMATION

Condensation in Lamp Assemblies

Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions.

Examples of acceptable condensation are:

• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets).

• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.

Examples of unacceptable condensation are:

• A water puddle inside the lamp.

• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens.

If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

LIGHTING CONTROL

Off

Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps

Headlamps C

High Beams

Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on.

Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Lighting

Headlamp Flasher

Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

(If Equipped)

WARNING

The autolamps switch position may not activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime fog. Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a collision.

If equipped, the following also activate when the lighting control is in the autolamps position and you switch them on in the information display:

• Configurable daytime running lamps.

• Automatic high beam control.

• Adaptive headlamp control.

The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps

remain on. See Information Displays

Dimming in the information display. See

Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps position, you cannot switch the high beam headlamps on until the autolamps system turns the low beam headlamps on.

Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps

The windshield wiper activated headlamps turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on and the lighting control is in the autolamps position. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off.

The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation:

• During a mist wipe.

• When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition.

• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.

Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate.

When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps automatically turn on in low light situations or when the wipers activate.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Lighting

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

DIMMER

Note: You disable the manual dimmer when you adjust the setting to Auto

Information Displays (page 87).

Note: If you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged, the illuminated components will switch to the maximum setting.

Press repeatedly or press and hold until you reach the desired level.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

After you switch the ignition off, you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

WARNING

Always remember to switch your headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather. The system does not activate the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

To switch the system on:

Switch the ignition on.

2. Switch the lighting control to the off or autolamp position.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM

CONTROL

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. A manual override may be necessary if the system fails to switch the high beam on or off.

A manual override may be required when approaching other road users such as cyclists.

Do not use the system in fog.

In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. A manual override may be necessary in these cases.

The system may not deactivate the high beam if the lights of oncoming vehicles are hidden by obstacles (for example guard rails).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Lighting

WARNINGS

Check and replace wiper blades regularly to ensure the camera sensor has a clear view through the windscreen. Replacement wiper blades must be the correct length.

Note: Keep the windscreen free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice.

Note: Reflective road signs may be detected as oncoming traffic and the headlamps will be switched to low beam.

Note: Always fit Ford Original Parts when replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may reduce system performance.

The system will automatically switch on high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead the system will switch off high beam before it can distract other road users. Low beam will remain on.

A camera sensor is centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle. This monitors conditions continuously to decide when to switch the high beams on and off.

Once the system is active the high beam will switch on if:

• It is dark enough to require the use of high beams and

• there is no traffic or street lighting ahead and

• vehicle speed is greater than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

The high beam will switch off if:

• The ambient light is high enough that high beam is not required.

• An approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps are detected.

• Street lighting is detected.

• Vehicle speed falls below approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).

• The camera sensor is too hot or becomes blocked.

• You switch the rear fog lamps on.

Activating the System

Switch the system on using the information

display. See Information Displays (page

87). Turn the switch to the autolamps

position. See Autolamps (page 64).

The indicator will illuminate to confirm when the system is ready to assist.

Manually Overriding the System

Push or pull the lever to switch between high and low beam.

Note: This is a temporary override and the system will return to automatic operation after a short period.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Lighting

To permanently switch the system off, use the information display menu or turn the lighting control switch to the headlamps position.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off.

You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except off.

Note: Only use fog lamps during reduced visibility, for example, fog, snow or heavy rain.

Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can only switch the fog lamps on once autolamps has turned the headlamps on.

REAR FOG LAMPS

Press the control to switch the fog lamps on or off.

You can only switch the rear fog lamps on when either the front fog lamps or low beam headlamps are on.

Note: Only use the rear fog lamps when visibility is less than 164 feet (50 meters).

Note: Do not use the rear fog lamps when it is raining or snowing.

Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can only switch the fog lamps on once autolamps has turned the headlamps on.

HEADLAMP LEVELING

Adjust the level of the headlamp beams according to your vehicle load.

Set the headlamp leveling control to zero when your vehicle is unloaded. Set the headlamp beams to give between

115–328 ft (35–100 m) of road surface illumination when your vehicle is partially or fully loaded.

To adjust the level of the headlamp beams:

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Press to release the control.

2. Rotate the control to the required setting.

Lighting

3. Press to close the control.

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS

The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel. This provides more visibility when driving around curves.

A. Without adaptive headlamps

B. With adaptive headlamps

The system will only work with the lighting control switch in the autolamp position.

Note: There may be a delay of up to five seconds before the system will operate when the vehicle is first driven.

Note: The system is only active at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h).

When the vehicle is started, the lamps track to a predetermined position, then back to center to alert the driver that the system is working properly.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

CORNERING LAMPS

Lighting

Headlamp beam

Cornering lamp beam

The cornering lamps illuminate the inside of a corner when you are turning.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators.

Lighting

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change.

INTERIOR LAMPS

The lamps will turn on when you have met one of the following conditions:

• You open any door.

• You press a remote control button.

• You press the all lamps on button on the front interior lamp.

Front Interior Lamp

Note: The front interior lamp buttons are on the overhead console. The exact location of each button on the overhead console depends upon which roof, moonroof, and window shade features are equipped on the vehicle.

Note: Press the button to switch the door function off when you open any door. The indicator lamp will light amber when the door function is off. When the door function is off and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps will stay off. Press the button again to switch the door function back on.

The indicator lamp will light blue when the door function is on. When the door function is on and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps will light.

Type 1

Type 2

All lamps on button

Door function button

All lamps off button

Individual dome lamps

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

All lamps on button

Door function button

Type 3

All lamps off button

Individual dome lamps

Lighting

Rear Interior Lamp

(If Equipped)

Type 1

Type 2

Door function button

All lamps on button

Individual dome lamps

You can switch individual map lamps on independently by pressing a map lens.

Type 3

You can switch dome lamps on by pressing the button.

AMBIENT LIGHTING

(If Equipped)

The ambient lighting system is adjusted

with the touchscreen system. See

SYNC™ 2 (page 344).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGS

Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves.

When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.

2. Release the control.

3. Open the window and then try to close it automatically.

4. Repeat the procedure if the window does not close automatically.

Window Lock

Press the control to open the window.

Lift the control to close the window.

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise.

One-Touch Down

Press the control fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up

Lift the control fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window.

Resetting One-Touch Up

Lift and hold the control until the window is fully closed.

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It lights when the rear window controls lock.

Bounce-Back

The window stops automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING

When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window travels up with no bounce-back protection. The window stops if you release the switch before the window is fully closed.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors

Accessory Delay

You can use the window controls for several minutes after switching off the ignition or until opening either front door.

GLOBAL OPENING AND

CLOSING

You can use the remote control to operate the windows with the ignition off.

Note: You can enable or disable this feature in the information display or see an

authorized dealer. See (page 87).

Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay must not be active.

Opening the Windows

You can only open the windows for a short time after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your vehicle, press and hold the remote control unlock button to open the windows and vent the moonroof. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement.

Closing the Windows

WARNING

When closing the windows and moonroof, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.

To close the windows and moonroof, press and hold the remote control lock button.

Release the button once movement starts.

Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power Exterior Mirrors

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving.

Left-hand mirror.

Adjustment control.

Right-hand mirror.

To adjust a mirror:

Press A or C to select the mirror you want to adjust. The control lights.

2. Press B to adjust the mirror's position.

3. Press the mirror control again. The light turns off.

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors

Power-Folding Mirrors

(If Equipped)

To fold both mirrors, make sure you switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then:

Press the control to fold the mirrors.

2. Press the control again to unfold.

Note: Once you press the control, you cannot stop the mirrors midway through their movement. Wait until the mirrors stop moving and press the control again.

Auto-Folding Mirrors

Note: The auto-fold mirrors operate only if they are in an unfolded position. If you folded the mirrors using the power-folding control, then you must unfold the mirrors using the power-folding control so the auto-fold feature can work.

The mirrors fold automatically when you lock the vehicle. The mirrors unfold when you unlock the vehicle.

You can switch this feature on or off using the vehicle settings menu in the information display.

Loose Mirror

If your power-folding mirrors are manually folded, they may not work properly even after you re-position them. You need to reset them if they:

• Vibrate while driving or feel loose.

• Do not stay in the folded or unfolded position.

To reset the power-fold feature:

Use the power-folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors.

2. When you hear one or both of the mirrors make a loud noise, it means that you reset the mirrors successfully.

This noise is normal.

3. Repeat this process each time the mirrors are manually folded.

Even though the power-folding mirrors typically operate electronically, you can still fold and unfold them manually. After any manual adjustment, however, the power-folding mirrors become unsynchronized, even after repositioning them.

An unsynchronized mirror may:

• Not fold or unfold normally.

• Not stay in its set position.

• Feel loose or even vibrate at normal driving speeds.

You can reset the mirrors by doing the following:

Use the power-folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors.

2. When you hear one or both of the mirrors make a loud noise, it means that you reset the mirrors successfully.

This noise is normal.

3. Repeat this process each time the power-folding mirrors fold or unfold manually.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors

Reverse Mirror Dipping

One of your exterior mirrors automatically dips down when you place your vehicle into reverse (R). This feature gives you a view of the curb.

To use, do the following:

Select a mirror using the power mirror control.

2. When you place your vehicle into reverse (R), the mirror automatically dips.

The exterior mirror automatically returns to its original position when:

• Your vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph

(10 km/h).

• Your vehicle is no longer in reverse (R).

• You switched the power mirror control off.

The mirror automatically adjusts to a set position, but you can change the position by doing the following:

Switch the ignition on.

2. Select the mirror you want to re-position.

3. Put your vehicle into reverse (R) and let the mirror automatically dip to its set position.

4. When the mirror is in its dipped position and is no longer moving, re-position it to your preference.

5. Put your vehicle into park (P).

6. Use the memory preset control to save

the position. See Memory Function

(page 129).

Heated Exterior Mirrors

(If Equipped)

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page

123).

Memory Mirrors

(If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function.

See Memory Function (page 129).

Auto-Dimming Feature

(If Equipped)

The driver exterior mirror automatically dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns on.

Direction Indicator Mirrors

(If Equipped)

The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you switch on the direction indicator.

Blind Spot Monitor

(If Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System

(page 203).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products.

You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side.

Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors

Auto-Dimming Mirror

(If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.

The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up.

CHILDMINDER MIRROR

On double bin overhead consoles, the conversation mirror allows the driver to view the rear seating area.

WARNING

Do not use the childminder mirror to view rearward traffic, do not allow rear passengers to distract you from the driving task, and make sure the rear view mirror has a clear view of rearward traffic. Failure to do so could increase the risk of a crash from an unseen vehicle, which may result in serious injury.

Pull down the rear edge of the childminder mirror to open. You can adjust the childminder mirror to any position up to full open to aid in visibility.

SUN VISORS

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

Windows and Mirrors

SUN SHADES - VEHICLES

WITH: PANORAMIC ROOF

PANEL

WARNINGS

Do not let children play with the sun shade or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.

When closing the sun shade, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the sunshade.

The controls are located in the overhead console.

The sun shade has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop motion during one-touch operation, press the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the Sun

Shade

Sunshade open.

Press and release to open the sun shade.

Sunshade close.

Press and release to close the sun shade.

Bounce-Back

The sun shade will stop automatically while closing. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.

Sun Shade Relearning

WARNING

The bounce-back function is not active during this procedure. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the way of the moving sun shade.

Note: You must start the relearning process within 30 seconds of switching the ignition on.

In case the sun shade no longer opens or closes properly, follow this relearning procedure:

Press the sunshade open control to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds.

2. Press the sunshade close control to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds.

3. Press and hold the sunshade open control to the first action point, until the sun shade fully opens.

4. Press and hold the sunshade close control to the first action point, until the sun shade fully closes.

If you do not complete Step 2 within 15 seconds of Step 1, the relearning function ends. Switch the ignition off, wait for another 30 seconds and then switch the ignition back on again. Start the procedure again from the beginning.

Confirm that relearning was successful by opening and closing the sun shade.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Windows and Mirrors

MOONROOF - VEHICLES WITH:

PANORAMIC ROOF OPENING

PANEL

WARNINGS

Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves.

When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening.

The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its movement during one-touch operation, press the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

Sunshade open.

Press and release to open the sunshade.

The sunshade opens automatically with the moonroof. You can also open the sunshade with the moonroof closed.

Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully opened position for the comfort of rear passengers. To open the sunshade fully, press the control again.

Sunshade close.

Press and release to close the sunshade. If fully open, the sunshade stops after covering the rear glass panel. Press and release again to fully close the sunshade.

Moonroof close.

Press and release to close the moonroof from either the open or vent positions.

Bounce-Back

The moonroof automatically reverses some distance if an obstacle is detected while closing.

To override this feature, press and hold the moonroof close control within two seconds after the roof comes to a stop following a bounce-back reversal.

Moonroof open.

Press and release to open the moonroof.

The moonroof stops short of the fully opened position. Press and release the control again to open the moonroof fully.

Moonroof vent.

Press and release to vent the moonroof.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

GAUGES

Type 1 and 2

Instrument Cluster

Tachometer

Information Display

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Type 3

Instrument Cluster

Tachometer

Information Display

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

Information Display

Odometer

Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled.

Outside Air Temperature

Shows the outside air temperature.

Compass

Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.

Trip Computer

Vehicle Settings and Personalization

is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 189).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Instrument Cluster

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle remains in the center section.

If the needle enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down.

Note: Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved.

WARNING

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot.

Fuel Gauge

Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.

Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.

Variations:

Driving type (fuel economy conditions)

Highway driving

Fuel gauge position

1/16th

Severe duty driving (trailer towing, extended idle)

The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle needs service soon.

After refueling some variability in needle position is normal:

• It may take a short time for the needle to reach F after leaving the gas station.

This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station.

• The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than the gauge indicated. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the gas station.

• If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full, try a different gas pump nozzle.

Low Fuel Reminder

A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel gauge needle is at 1/16th.

1/16th

Distance-to-empty

35 miles to 80 miles (56 km to 129 km)

35 miles (56km)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Instrument Cluster

WARNING LAMPS AND

INDICATORS

The following warning lamps and indicators alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information.

Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and operate the same as a warning lamp but do not illuminate when you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control

(If Equipped)

The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system

On (white light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.

Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.

Anti-Lock Braking System Warning

Lamp

If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking system

(without anti-lock braking system) unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Automatic High Beam Lamp

(If

Equipped)

Illuminates when this feature is

on. See Automatic High Beam

Control (page 65).

Auto Start-stop

(If Equipped)

Illuminates to inform you when the engine shuts down or in conjunction with a message.

Battery Warning Lamp

If it illuminates when driving, this indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor Indicator

(If

Equipped)

Illuminates when you switch this feature off or in conjunction with a

Information

System

(page 203). See Information

Messages (page 96).

message. See

Blind Spot

Brake System Warning Lamp

Illuminates when you engage the parking brake with the ignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Instrument Cluster

WARNING

Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.

Cruise Control

(If Equipped)

Illuminates when you switch this

feature on. See Using Cruise

Control (page 189).

Direction Indicator

Illuminates when the left or right direction indicator or the hazard warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check

for a burnt out bulb. See Changing a Bulb

(page 254).

Door Ajar

Illuminates when the vehicle is on and any door is not completely closed.

Electric Park Brake

Illuminates when the electric parking brake has a malfunction.

Engine Coolant Temperature

Illuminates when the engine or motor coolant temperature is high. Stop your vehicle as soon as possible and contact your authorized dealer.

Engine Oil Warning Lamp

WARNING

If it illuminates when you are driving do not continue your journey, even if the oil level is correct. Have your vehicle checked.

If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the

engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 247).

Fasten Safety Belt Warning Lamp

Illuminates and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten

your safety belt. See Safety

Belt Minder (page 28).

Front Airbag Warning Lamp

If the warning lamp does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the system may be disabled.

Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps Indicator

(If Equipped)

Illuminates when you switch the front fog lamps on.

Frost Warning Lamp

WARNING

Even if the temperature rises to above 39°F (4°C) there is no guarantee that the road is free of hazards caused by inclement weather.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Instrument Cluster

Illuminates when the outside air temperature is 39°F (4°C) or below.

Fuel Operated Heater Enabled

Illuminates when you switch the fuel operated heater on.

Fuel Operated Heater Operating

Illuminates to inform you the fuel operated heater is currently in operation.

Glow Plug Indicator

With the key in the on position,

Illuminates when the glow plug heat is necessary as a starting aid. Wait until the light goes off before starting.

After you start the engine, the light should turn off. When the engine is cold, the light should always light for a short period.

Heads Up Display

(If Equipped)

A red beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in certain instances when using adaptive cruise control or the pre-collision warning system. It will also light momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works.

High Beam Indicator

Illuminates when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.

Hill Start Assist Indicator

Illuminates when the system is not available.

Hood Ajar

Illuminates when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed.

Lane Keeping Aid

(If Equipped)

Illuminates when you activate the lane keeping system.

Liftgate Ajar

Illuminates when the liftgate is not completely closed.

Low Beam Malfunction

Illuminates when there is a malfunction with the low beam headlamp bulb.

Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp

If it illuminates when you are driving, refuel as soon as possible.

Low Tyre Pressure Warning

Illuminates when your tyre pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tyre pressure as soon as possible.

It will also light momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not light when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Instrument Cluster

Low Washer Fluid

Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low.

Headlamp and Parking Lamp

Indicator

Illuminates when you switch the headlamps or parking lamps on.

Powertrain Fault

Illuminates when a powertrain or an all-wheel drive fault has been detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Rear Fog Lamps Indicator

Illuminates when you switch the rear fog lamps on.

Service Engine Soon

If the service engine soon indicator light stays illuminated after the engine is started, it indicates that the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emissions control system.

Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more information about having your vehicle serviced.

If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately.

WARNING

Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.

The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.

Normally, the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for

I/M testing.

Shift Indicator

Illuminates to inform you that shifting to a higher or lower gear as indicated may give better fuel economy and lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminate during periods of high acceleration, braking or when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Speed Limiter

Illuminates when you switch on the speed limiter system.

Flashes when you exceed the set

speed limit. See Speed Limiter (page 196).

Stability Control Off Indicator

Illuminates when you switch the system off. It will go out when you switch the system back on

or when you switch the ignition off. See

Using Stability Control (page 175).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Instrument Cluster

Stability Control Warning Lamp

It will flash when the system is active. If it remains illuminated or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system will switch off. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer

immediately. See Using Stability

Control (page 175).

Traffic Sign Recognition No

Passing

Illuminates when a no passing sign is detected by the traffic sign recognition system.

Traffic Sign Recognition Speed

Limit

Illuminates when the current speed limit is detected by the traffic sign recognition system.

If the traffic sign speed warning is enabled, the light flashes when you have exceeded the speed limit detected by the traffic sign recognition system.

Water-In-Fuel

(If Equipped)

Illuminates when there is excess water in the fuel filter. Drain off

the water immediately. See

Fuel Quality (page 153).

Keyless Warning Alert

(If Equipped)

Sounds the horn twice when you exit your vehicle with the intelligent access key, after the last door is closed and your keyless vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is still on.

Headlamps On Warning Chime

Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on.

Parking Brake On Warning Chime

Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS

Key in Ignition Warning Chime

Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Note: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with all the messages listed in this chapter. Your vehicle does not display messages of systems it is not equipped with.

Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel.

Corresponding information is displayed in the information display.

Information Display Controls

(Type 1 and 2)

• Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages.

You can access the menu using the information display control.

This icon gives you the ability to switch a feature on or off. A check in the box indicates the feature is enabled, and unchecked indicates the feature is disabled.

Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Speed

Dist to empty

Trip odometer

Trip timer

Fuel used

Average fuel

Outside temp

All values

Trip computer 1

Trip computer 2

Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.

Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel.

Registers the distance of individual journeys.

The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle.

Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.

Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.

Shows the outside air temperature.

Dist to empty

Trip odometer

Trip timer

Average fuel

Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time and fuel information.

Dist to empty

Instant fuel

Average fuel

Fuel history

Fuel economy

Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel.

Shows a graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along with your average fuel economy since the function was last reset.

Shows your average fuel economy.

Shows a bar chart of your fuel history.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Average speed

All values

Auto StartStop

Fuel economy

Shows your average speed since the function was last reset.

Dist to empty

Instant fuel

Average fuel

Average speed

Available Auto Start-Stop messaging provides details about what is happening

with your system. See Information

Messages (page 96).

Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left-hand steering wheel controls.

Driver assist

Traction control

BLIS

Cross traffic alrt

Cruise control

Driver alert

Select. susp.

Hill start assist

Intelligent AWD

Lane keeping

Select setting

Pre-collision

Speed limiter

Mode

Intensity

Alert sensitivity

Dist. indication

Active braking

Manual

Select setting

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Traffic signs

Driver assist

Intelligent

Tolerance

Speed minder Speed warning tolerance

Chime

Tyre pressure Tyre monitor

Trailer control

Tyre pressure

Displays your current vehicle tire pressures.

Vehicle Alarm system

Settings

Select setting

Ask on exit

Auto engine off

Chimes

DTE calculation

Easy entry/exit

Park slot found

Information

Select setting

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

MyKey

Lighting

Locks

Power mirror

Oil life reset

Park heater

Settings

Adapt. hdlamp

Auto highbeam

Hdlamp delay

Daytime lights

Auto lock

Auto unlock

Relock

Mislock

Unlocking

Switches inhibit

Autofold

Reverse tilt

Hold OK to reset

Continue heat

Programming

Park lock control

Power liftgate

Seatbelts

Silent mode

Windows

Wipers

Create MyKey

Emerg. Assist.

Do not disturb

Traction control

Select setting

Adapt. hdlamp

Traffic (R/L) Select setting

Select setting

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Settings

Display

Max speed

Speed minder

Volume limit

Clear MyKeys

Measure unit

Temp unit

Tyre pressure

Language

Select setting

Information Display Controls

(Type 3)

• Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button).

• Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages.

You can access the menu using the information display control.

Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional.

Trip computer

All Values Trip timer

Trip odometer

Average fuel

Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Instant fuel

Fuel history

Average speed

Auto StartStop

Fuel economy

Shows a graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.

Shows a bar chart of your fuel history.

Shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.

Available Auto Start-Stop messaging provides details about what is happening

with your system. See Information

Messages (page 96).

Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls.

Driver assist

Traction control

Adaptive steering Steering in D

Steering in S

BLIS

Cross traffic alert

Cruise control

Driver alert

Hill start assist

Intelligent AWD

Lane keeping

Select setting

Pre-collision Assist

Mode

Intensity

Alert sensitivity

Distance indication

Active braking

Front Park Pilot

Select setting

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Rear Park Pilot

Speed limiter

Traffic signs

Driver assist

Manual

Intelligent

Tolerance

Speed warning

Tyre pressure

Speed warning tolerance

Chime

Tyre monitor

Trailer control

Tyre pressure

Displays your current vehicle tire pressures.

Vehicle Alarm system

Settings

Select setting

Ask on exit

Auto engine off

Chimes Park space found

Information

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

MyKey

Settings

Select. suspension

DTE calculation

Easy entry/exit

Lighting

Select setting

Adaptive headlamps Adaptive headlamps

Traffic setup Select setting

Locks

Mirrors

Oil life

Park heater

Auto highbeam

Headlamp delay

Daytime lights

Auto lock

Auto unlock

Relock

Mislock

Unlocking

Switches inhibit

Autofold

Hold OK to reset

Continue heat

Programming

Park lock control

Power liftgate Select setting

Seatbelts

Windows

Wipers

Create MyKey

Emergency

Assist.

Select setting

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Display

Settings

Do not disturb

Traction control

Max speed

Speed minder

Volume limit

Clear MyKeys

Measure unit

Select setting

Temperature unit

Select setting

Tyre pressure

Language

INFORMATION MESSAGES

Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all of the messages will display or be available. The information display may abbreviate or shorten certain messages.

Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. The information display will automatically remove other messages after a short time.

You need to confirm certain messages before you can access the menus.

Active Park

Message

Active Park malfunction

Action

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Adaptive Cruise Control

Message Action

Adaptive cruise malfunction

Adaptive cruise not available

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control

from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

190).

A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-

tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

190).

Adaptive cruise not available Sensor blocked

See manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the

sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

190).

Cruise control active

Automatic braking turned off

The system has disabled the automatic braking.

Front sensor not aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging.

Adaptive cruise Driver resume control

The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.

Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.

Adaptive cruise Speed too low to activate

Adaptive cruise Shift down

The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission into a lower gear.

Airbag

Message

Occupant sensor blocked Remove objects near passenger seat

Action

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

Remove blockage.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Alarm

Message

Vehicle alarm Start vehicle to stop alarm

Alarm malfunction Service required

Action

Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft

Alarm (page 51).

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.

All-Wheel Drive

Message

AWD temporarily disabled

AWD off

AWD restored

AWD malfunction

Service required

Action

The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating.

The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare tire.

The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools.

The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.

Automatic Engine Shutdown

Message

Engine stops in {seconds to shut off:#0} seconds

Engine stops for fuel economy

Engine stops in {seconds to shut off:#0} seconds

OK = override

Action

The engine is getting ready to shut off.

The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.

The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Automatic High Beam Control

Message

Front camera Low visibility

Clean screen

Front camera malfunction

Service required

Front camera temporarily not available

Action

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield.

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time for the sensor to cool down.

Auto Start-Stop

Message

Auto StartStop Press brake to start engine

Action

The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to start.

Auto StartStop Press brake harder to activate

Auto StartStop Press clutch to start engine

Auto StartStop Press a pedal to start engine

The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder to start.

The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutch pedal to start.

The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start.

Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.

Auto StartStop Select neutral to start engine

Auto StartStop Shift to

P Restart engine

Auto StartStop Manual restart required

Auto StartStop not available

Select park for the system to restart the engine.

The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.

Conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system to function properly.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

Message

BLIS malfunction

BLIS not available

Sensor blocked See manual

Cross Traffic Vehicle

Coming From X

Cross Traffic not available Sensor blocked See manual

Action

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

The system sensors are blocked. See tion System

Blind Spot Informa-

(page 203).

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information

System (page 203).

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert

system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information

System (page 203).

Cross traffic malfunction A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer.

Climate Control

Message

Auxiliary Heater On

Auxiliary Heater Off

Action

The system is on. See Climate Control (page 111).

The system is off. See Climate Control (page 111).

Diesel Engine

Message

Engine warming Please wait {seconds:00} seconds

Water in fuel Drain filter

Fuel pressure low

Engine oil level low Add oil

Action

In extremely cold weather, typically below –15°F (–26°C) and if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds.

This restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly in order to avoid engine damage.

The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs draining.

A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed.

A low oil level condition has occurred with the oil minder system. Check your engine oil level. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.

100

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Doors and Locks

Message

Driver door open

Passenger door open

Rear left door open

Rear right door open

Liftgate open

Boot open

Bonnet open

Switches inhibited

Security mode

Child lock malfunction

Service required

Action

The door listed is not completely closed.

The trunk is not completely closed.

The hood is not completely closed.

The system has disabled the door switches.

There is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Driver Alert

Message

Driver fatigue warning

Rest now

Driver fatigue warning

Rest suggested

Action

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Take a rest break soon.

Electronic Stability Control

Message

ESC Service required

ESC off

ESC on

ESC Sport mode

Action

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

The traction control system status.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

101

Information Displays

Engine

Message

High engine temperature

Stop safely

Engine fault Service now

Water detected in fuel

Service required

Engine oil level low Check level

Action

Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool.

If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. See

Engine Coolant Check (page 248).

Engine service is required. See an authorized dealer.

Displays when water is detected in the fuel. See an authorized dealer.

Check the engine oil level See Engine Oil Check (page

247).

Fuel

Message

Fuel level low

Check fuel fill inlet

Action

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.

Fuel door opening

Fuel door open

Close fuel door

Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.

The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin to refuel.

A reminder to close the fuel door.

Refuel error See manual There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle.

Hill Start Assist

Message Action

Hill start assist not available

Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.

See Hill Start Assist (page 171).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

102

Information Displays

Keys and Keyless Entry

Message

Press brake to start

No key detected

Restart now or key is needed

Action

A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.

The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless

Starting (page 142).

You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key inside your vehicle.

Run Power Active

Starting system malfunction

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.

Key program successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system.

Key program failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system.

Maximum number of keys learned

Not enough keys learned

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system.

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.

Key battery low Replace soon

The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.

Engine on Informs you that they you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

103

Information Displays

Lane Keeping System

Message Action

Lane keeping system malfunction Service required

Front camera temporarily not available

Front camera Low visibility Clean screen

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield.

Front camera malfunction Service required

Keep hands on steering wheel

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering wheel.

Maintenance

Message

Engine oil pressure low

Change engine oil soon

Action

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer.

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil

Check (page 247).

Oil change required

Brake fluid level low

The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).

The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system

immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

Check brake system

Engine coolant overtemperature

The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

104

Information Displays

Message

Power reduced to lower engine temperature

Transport / Factory

Mode

See manual

Action

The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature.

Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an authorized dealer.

The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.

MyKey

Message

MyKey not created

Action

You cannot program a MyKey.

MyKey active Drive safely

Speed Limited to XX

MPH/km/h

MyKey is active.

Vehicle near top speed MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).

You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.

MyKey Vehicle at top speed

Check speed Drive safely You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.

Buckle up to unmute audio

MyKey ESC on

When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is on.

Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.

With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.

With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.

MyKey Traction control on

MyKey Park Pilot cannot be deactivated

With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.

MyKey Lane keeping alert on

With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

105

Information Displays

Park Aid

Message

Check front Park Pilot

Check rear Park Pilot

Front Park Pilot On Off

Rear Park Pilot On Off

Action

The system has detected a condition that requires service.

Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 176).

The system has detected a condition that requires service.

Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 176).

Displays the park aid status.

Park Brake

Message

Park brake applied

Park brake malfunction

Service now

Park brake not applied

Park brake Maintenance mode

Action

You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.

The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer.

The electric parking brake is not set.

The electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.

Park brake Use switch to release

The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it.

Park brake Press brake and switch to release

The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it and your vehicle is moving.

Park brake Limited function Service required

The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Park brake System overheated

You have not released the electric parking brake causing it to overheat.

Park Brake not released

Park brake applied

The electric parking brake is set and you have started your vehicle.

The electric parking brake is set.

You have released the electric parking brake.

106

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Power Steering

Message

Steering lock malfunction Service now

Steering loss Stop safely

Steering assist malfunction Service required

Action

The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer.

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Pre-Collision Warning System

Message

Forward Alert malfunction

Action

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer.

Forward Alert not available Sensor blocked See manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the

sensor to resolve. See Pre-Collision Assist (page 208).

Forward Alert not available

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer.

Seats

Message

Memory recall not permitted while driving

Memory {0} saved

Action

A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

107

Information Displays

Starting System

Message

Press brake to start

Cranking time exceeded

Action

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle.

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.

Engine start pending

Please wait

Pending start cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Message

Tyre pressure low

Tyre pressure monitor malfunction

Tyre pressure sensor malfunction

Action

One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 266).

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an

authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(page 266).

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in

use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 266). If

the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

108

Information Displays

Towing

Message

Trailer sway Reduce speed

Tow bar unlocked

Towing prohibited See manual

Tow bar malfunction

Towing prohibited

Service required

Action

Your trailer sway control has detected trailer sway so you need to reduce your speed.

Swivel the tow ball arm again. If the message remains on,

contact an authorized dealer. See Tow Ball (page 222).

See an authorized dealer.

Tow bar not activated

Start engine and retry

The vehicle battery may not have a full charge. Start the engine, and then swivel the tow ball arm. If the message

remains on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tow Ball (page

222).

Tow bar extended Check trailer wiring

Check the trailer wiring for any concerns. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer.

Traction Control

Message

Traction control off

Traction control on

Spinout detected

Hazards activated

Action

The status of the traction control system. See Using Traction

Control (page 173).

The status of the traction control system. See Using Traction

Control (page 173).

A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on.

Transmission

Message

Transmission malfunction Service now

Transmission overtemperature Stop safely

Transmission overheating Stop safely

Action

See an authorized dealer.

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible.

The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible.

109

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Information Displays

Message

Transmission Service required

Action

See an authorized dealer.

Transmission too hot

Press brake

Transmission limited function See manual

Transmission warming up Please wait

Transmission not in Park

Press brake pedal

Transmission adjusted

Transmission Adapt-

Mode

The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.

The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality.

See Automatic Transmission (page 159).

The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.

A reminder to shift into park.

A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the transmission.

The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.

The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.

Transmission Indicat-

Mode Lockup on

Transmission Indicat-

Mode Lockup off

The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.

The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

110

Climate Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Outside Air

Keep the air intakes in front of the windshield free from obstruction (such as snow or leaves) to allow the climate control system to function effectively.

Recirculated Air

WARNING

Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to mist up. If the windows mist up, follow the settings for demisting the windshield.

The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. Outside air does not enter your vehicle.

Heating

Heating performance depends on the temperature of the engine coolant.

General Information on Controlling the Interior Climate

Fully close all the windows.

Warming the Interior

Direct the air toward your feet. In cold or humid weather conditions, direct some of the air toward the windshield and the door windows.

Cooling the Interior

Direct the air toward your face.

Air Conditioning

The system directs air through the evaporator for cooling. The evaporator extracts humidity from the air to help keep the windows free of mist. The system directs the resulting condensation to the outside of your vehicle, which may cause a small pool to form under your vehicle.

This is normal.

Note: The air conditioning operates only when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).

Note: When you use air conditioning, your vehicle uses more fuel.

AIR VENTS

Center Air Vents

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

111

Side Air Vents

Climate Control

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: ELECTRONIC

MANUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EMTC)

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents.

112

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Climate Control

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle.

MAX Defrost: Adjust the control to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the windshield vents and the air conditioning automatically turns on. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.

MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents and the air conditioning automatically turns on.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.

This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.

Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on

and off. See Heated Seats (page 137).

Heated windshield (if equipped): Press the button to clear the heated

windshield of thin ice and fog. See Heated Windshield (page 123).

Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on

and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 123).

A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

113

Climate Control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: DUAL

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC)

Left-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control on the left-hand side. This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.

Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Fan speed indicator: Illuminates to indicate fan speed.

Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents.

Right-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the right-hand side.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

114

Climate Control

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.

This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.

MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.

Heated seats:

Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See

Heated Seats (page 137).

Heated windshield: Press the button to clear the heated windshield of thin

ice and fog. See Heated Windshield (page 123).

Heated steering wheel: Press the button to switch the heated steering wheel on and off.

MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.

Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on

and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 123).

AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

115

Climate Control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:

DUAL AUTOMATIC

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

(DATC)/SONY AUDIO SYSTEM

Note: You can switch temperature units

between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See

Settings (page 351).

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.

MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

116

Climate Control

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.

This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.

Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

Heated seats:

Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See

Heated Seats (page 137).

Right-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the right-hand side.

Note: The maximum difference between left-hand and right-hand settings may be limited. Whenever you make an adjustment that would result in a larger difference, both settings will change together.

Climate controlled seats: Press the button to switch the climate controlled

seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 138).

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Left-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control on the left-hand side. This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.

Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on

and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 123).

Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.

117

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Climate Control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE

CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:

TRIPLE ZONE AUTOMATIC

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Note: You can switch temperature units

between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See

Settings (page 351).

Left-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control on the left-hand side. This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Right-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the right-hand side.

Note: The maximum difference between left-hand and right-hand settings may be limited. Whenever you make an adjustment that would result in a larger difference, both settings will change together.

118

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Climate Control

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.

Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.

This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.

Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.

Heated windshield: Press the button to clear the heated windshield of thin

ice and fog. See Heated Windshield (page 123).

Heated seats:

Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See

Heated Seats (page 137).

Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on.

Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on

and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 123).

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE

INTERIOR CLIMATE

General Hints

Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up.

Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting.

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on.

119

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Climate Control

Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats.

Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.

Note: To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather, drive with the windows fully open until you feel cold air through the air vents.

Manual Climate Control

Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position.

Automatic Climate Control

Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your selected temperature as quickly as possible.

For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open.

Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up.

Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside temperatures, or when the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.

When the interior reaches the selected temperature, the system automatically switches to using outside air.

Heating the Interior Quickly

Vehicle with manual climate control

Adjust the fan speed to a high speed setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting.

Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons.

Vehicle with automatic climate control

Press the AUTO button.

Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

120

Climate Control

Recommended Settings for Heating

Vehicle with manual climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings.

Vehicle with automatic climate control

Press the AUTO button.

Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.

3 Select the footwell air vents using the air distribution buttons.

Cooling the Interior Quickly

Vehicle with manual climate control

Adjust the temperature control to the

MAX A/C position.

Drive with the windows fully open until you feel cold air through the air vents.

Vehicle with automatic climate control

Press the MAX A/C button.

Recommended Settings for Cooling

Vehicle with manual climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings.

Vehicle with automatic climate control

Press the AUTO button.

Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.

3 Select the instrument panel air vents using the air distribution buttons.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

121

Climate Control

Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather

Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control

Select the windshield air vents using the air distribution buttons.

Press the defrost button.

Press the A/C button.

Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary.

Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting.

Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting.

REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

122

Climate Control

Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on

and off. See Heated Seats (page 137).

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle.

Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents.

Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls.

HEATED WINDOWS AND

MIRRORS

(If Equipped)

Heated Rear Window

Note: Make sure the engine is running before operating the heated windows.

Press the button to clear the heated rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window will automatically turn off after a short period of time. Start the engine before you switch the heated rear window on.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window.

The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines.

Heated Exterior Mirror

When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors will automatically turn on.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.

HEATED WINDSHIELD

Press the button to clear the heated windshield of thin ice and fog. The heated windshield automatically turns off after a short period of time. Start the engine before you switch the heated windshield on.

Note: The system does not operate if the battery charge level is low.

CABIN AIR FILTER

Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits:

• It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration.

• It improves the interior compartment cleanliness.

• It protects the climate control components from particle deposits.

You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box.

Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system.

123

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Climate Control

Replace the filter at regular intervals.

For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

124

Seats

SITTING IN THE CORRECT

POSITION

WARNINGS

Do not recline the seat backrest too far as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash.

Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seat backrest reclined too far, can result in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat backrest, with your feet on the floor.

Do not place objects higher than the seat backrest to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking.

When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash.

We recommend that you follow these guidelines:

• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible.

• Do not recline the seat backrest more than 30 degrees.

• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible.

Make sure that you remain comfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 inches

(25 centimeters) between your breastbone and the airbag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGS

Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving.

The head restraint is a safety device.

Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied.

Install the head restraint properly to help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

125

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Seats

Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position.

Front seat head restraints

Rear seat outboard and center head restraints

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Raising the Head Restraint

Pull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint

Press and hold button C.

2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint

Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position.

2. Press and hold buttons C and D.

3. Pull the head restraint up.

Installing the Head Restraint

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until in locks.

Tilting Head Restraints

(If Equipped)

The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following:

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing head restraint.

Two steel stems.

Guide sleeve adjust and unlock button.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove button.

Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position.

126

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Seats

After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward again will then release it to the rearward, un-tilted position.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNINGS

Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving.

Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.

Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat's safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash.

The driver and passenger manual seats may consist of:

A bar to move the seat backward and forward.

A control to adjust the lumbar of the seatback (driver seat only).

A lever to adjust the height of the seat (driver seat only).

A lever to adjust the angle of the seatback.

POWER SEATS

WARNINGS

Do not adjust the front seat or seatback while your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle.

Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

127

Seats

Power Lumbar

Multi-Contour Front Seats With

Active Motion

(If Equipped)

Note: The massage system will turn off after 20 minutes.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

128

Note: The engine must be running or the vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate the seats.

Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection to activate. The seatback and cushion massage cannot function at the same time.

Seats

Massage mode

Back massage intensity adjustment

Lumbar and bolster mode

Upper lumbar

Massage intensity decrease and off

Cushion massage intensity adjustment

Massage intensity increase

Lumbar decrease

Lower lumbar

D Lumbar increase

E On and off -

The massage feature will default to an alternating massage mode with back massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar and bolster feature will default to the middle lumbar mode.

Press C a second time to adjust the back bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the cushion bolster.

You can also adjust this feature through the touchscreen.

Press the Menu Settings icon, then Vehicle. Choose

Multi-Contour Seats.

When switched on, the system displays directions for you to adjust the lumbar settings in your seat or to set the massage function.

To access and make adjustments to the lumbar setting:

Choose the desired seat to adjust.

2. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar intensity.

To access and make adjustments to the massage setting:

Press the Menu Settings icon, then

Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour Seats.

2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.

3. Press OFF, LO or HI.

MEMORY FUNCTION

WARNINGS

Before activating the seat memory, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts.

Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving.

This feature automatically recalls the position of the driver seat, power mirrors and optional power steering column. The memory control is on the driver door.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

129

Seats

Saving a PreSet Position

Switch the ignition on.

2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column to your desired position.

3. Press and hold the desired preset button until you hear a single tone.

You can save up to three preset memory positions. You can save a memory preset at any time.

Recalling a Preset Position

Press and release the preset button associated with your desired driving position. The seat, mirrors and steering column move to the position stored for that preset.

Note: You can only recall a preset memory position when the ignition is off, or when the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)

(and your vehicle is not moving) if the ignition is on.

You can also recall a preset memory position by:

• Pressing the unlock button on your integrated keyhead transmitter or keyless entry key fob if it is linked to a preset position.

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.

Note: Pressing any active memory feature adjustment control - power seat, mirror or steering column switch (or any memory button) during a memory recall, cancels the operation.

Linking a Preset Position to your

Remote Control or Keyless Entry

Key Fob

You can save preset memory positions for up to three remote controls or keyless entry key fobs.

With the ignition on, move the memory positions to the desired positions.

2. Press and hold the desired preset button for about five seconds. A tone sounds after about two seconds.

Continue holding until a second tone sounds.

3. Within three seconds, press the lock button on the remote control you are linking.

To unlink a remote control, follow the same procedure – except in step 3, press the unlock button on the remote control.

Note: If more than one linked remote control or keyless entry key fob is in range, the memory function moves to the settings of the first key to initiate a memory recall.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature

If you enable the easy entry and exit feature, it automatically moves the driver seat position rearward up to two inches

(five centimeters) when you switch the ignition off.

The driver seat returns to the previous position when you switch the ignition on.

You can enable or disable this feature in

the information display. See Information

Displays (page 87).

130

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Seats

REAR SEATS

Second Row Seats

Moving the Seats Backward and

Forward

WARNING

Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in its catch.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

131

Adjusting the Seatback

Seats

To recline the seatback, pull the lever on the outboard seats or the strap on the center seat and lean back against the seatback until it reaches the desired position.

To raise the seatback, pull the lever up and push the seat cushion forward using your weight.

Easy Entry Position (Vehicles with

Third Row Seats Only)

Note: You can move the outboard seats forward to allow access to the third row seats.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

132

Seats

Pull the lever once. Move the seat into the position shown and slide the complete seat forward.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

133

Seats

2. When exiting your vehicle from the third row seats, push the lever up on the upper corner of the outboard seats.

3. To return the seat to the seating position, slide the seat backward and down until the seat latches to the floor.

The seat will stop automatically at a midway position.

4. To move the seat further back, pull the lever under the front of the seat and slide it backward.

Folding the Seatbacks Down

WARNING

When folding the seatbacks down, hold the seatback to avoid getting your fingers caught between the seatback and seat frame.

Lower the head restraints. See Head

Restraints (page 125).

2. Slide the seats backward as far as they will go.

3. Insert the center seat belt into the retainer in the roof.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

134

Seats

4. On the outboard seats, pull the lever and fold the seatback flat.

5. On the center seat, pull the strap between the seat cushion and the seatback and fold down the seatback.

To return the seat to the seating position, pull the seatback until it engages.

EasyFold™ Folding Seat

WARNING

Make sure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down.

Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to the seat or injury.

Note: The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park (P) and the liftgate has been open for less than 10 minutes.

The controls are located on the left-hand rear quarter trim panel (accessible from the liftgate area).

135

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Seats

Moving the Seats Backward and

Forward (Galaxy)

WARNING

Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in its catch.

Third row seat (optional) - For

Galaxy vehicles, press the left or right control to lower or raise your desired seatback. For

S-Max vehicles, press the left or right control to lower your desired seatback. Lift the seatback until it latches in the upright position.

Second row seats - Press the left, center or right control to lower your desired seatback. To return the seatback to the upright position, lift the seatback until it latches in the upright position.

Third Row Seats

WARNING

Do not sit in a third row seat when the second row seat in front of it is folded flat.

Adjusting the Seatback (Galaxy)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

136

Seats

To recline the seatback, pull the strap and lean back against the seatback until it reaches the desired position.

To raise the seatback, pull the strap and let the seatback return to the upright position.

Folding the Seats Flat

WARNING

When folding the seatbacks down, hold the seatback to avoid getting your fingers caught between the seatback and seat frame.

Pull loop A at the top of the seat. The seatback will automatically fold down.

2. To return the seat to the seating position, pull loop B.

Creating a Level Load Floor

WARNING

When transporting a load with the seats folded flat, always fold the relevant carpeted cover forward to cover the folded seats.

HEATED SEATS

(If Equipped)

WARNING

People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat.

Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.

• Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

137

Seats

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off.

Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS

Heated Seats

WARNING

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat.

• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless the engine is running. Doing so can cause the battery to lose charge.

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off.

Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights.

Cooled Seats

(If Equipped)

The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.

To operate the cooled seats:

Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are indicated by more indicator lights.

If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself off. You will need to reactivate it.

Climate controlled seat air filter replacement (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air filters that are integrated with the seats.

Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.

138

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Auxiliary Power Points

12 Volt DC Power Point

WARNING

Do not plug electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 15 amps. After you switch the ignition off, the power supply works only for a maximum of 75 minutes.

Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This damages the outlet and blows the fuse.

Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.

Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a fuse may blow.

Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element.

Note: Incorrect use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty.

Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.

Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point.

To prevent your vehicle battery from running out of charge:

• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when your engine is not running.

• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when your vehicle is in park

(P) for extended periods.

Location

Power points may be found:

• On the center console.

• Inside the center console.

• On the rear of the console.

• In the cargo area.

230 Volt Power Point

(If Equipped)

WARNING

Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 230 volt power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload. Powering multiple devices can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.

Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the power point.

You can use the power point for powering electrical devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on the rear of the center console.

The power point indicator light, located on the power point, shows when the power point is ready for use.

When the power point indicator light is:

• On — the power point is ready to supply power.

• Off — the power point power supply is off and so is the ignition.

• Flashing — the power point is in fault mode.

The power point temporarily turns off its power if the electrical load exceeds the

150 watt limit. The power point can also switch to a fault mode if it detects overloading, overheating or shorting conditions.

139

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Auxiliary Power Points

For overloading and shorting conditions, unplug your device and switch the ignition off and then on.

For an overheating condition, let the system cool first. Then, switch the ignition off and on again.

Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including:

• Cathode ray tube type televisions.

• Motor loads, for example vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools, or compressor-driven refrigerators.

• Measuring devices which process precise data, for example medical equipment or measuring equipment.

• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply, for example microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch sensor lamps.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

140

Storage Compartments

CENTER CONSOLE

Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks which may spill.

Available console features include:

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

Press near the rear edge of the door to open it.

Auxiliary power point (if equipped).

Storage compartment with auxiliary input jack, media hub, and optional USB port.

Cupholder.

Storage tray.

Auxiliary power point with power inverter or cigar lighter (if equipped).

F Storage compartment with auxiliary power point.

Note: Depending on your vehicle, auxiliary power point locations could be in locations

A or B.

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the smoker's package, auxiliary power points in locations B and E could be replaced with a cigar lighter.

141

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS

Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas.

Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine.

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles

(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period.

The powertrain control system meets all

Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise.

When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine.

IGNITION SWITCH

Note: Make sure the key is clean before inserting it into any lock cylinder.

0 (off) - The ignition is off.

Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.

I (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long to avoid your vehicle battery losing charge.

II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.

Warning lamps and indicators are illuminated.

III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESS STARTING

Note: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones.

Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

142

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Ignition Modes

The keyless starting system has three modes:

Off: Turns the ignition off.

• Without applying the clutch pedal

(manual transmission) or brake pedal

(automatic transmission), press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not moving.

On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.

• Without applying the clutch pedal

(manual transmission) or brake pedal

(automatic transmission), press and release the button once.

Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may not start when the vehicle starts.

• Press the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal

(automatic transmission), and then press the button for any length of time.

An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK -

VEHICLES WITH: KEYLESS

VEHICLE SYSTEM

Your vehicle has an electronically controlled steering wheel lock that operates automatically.

The system will lock the steering wheel after a short period of time once you have parked your vehicle and the passive key is outside your vehicle, or when you lock your vehicle.

Note: The system will not lock the steering wheel when the ignition is on or while your vehicle is moving.

Unlocking the Steering Wheel

Switch the ignition on to unlock the steering wheel.

Note: You may have to rotate the steering wheel slightly to assist unlocking.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK -

VEHICLES WITHOUT: KEYLESS

VEHICLE SYSTEM

WARNING

Always check that the steering is unlocked before attempting to move your vehicle.

To lock the steering wheel:

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly to engage the lock.

To unlock the steering wheel:

Insert the key in the ignition switch.

2. Turn the key to position I .

143

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Note: You may need to rotate the steering wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is a steering wheel load applied.

STARTING A GASOLINE

ENGINE

When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the engine 3 times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting, you reached the

60-second time limit. A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again.

Before starting the engine check the following:

• Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts.

• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.

• Make sure the parking brake is on.

• Make sure the transmission is in park

(P) or neutral.

• Switch the ignition key to position II .

For vehicles with keyless ignition, see the following instructions.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Fully depress the brake pedal. For vehicles with manual transmission, fully depress both the clutch and brake pedals.

2. Turn the key to position III to start the engine. Release the key when the engine starts.

Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.

Note: If you cannot start the engine after the first attempt, wait for a short period and try again.

Vehicles with Keyless Start

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: A valid passive key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle.

Fully depress the brake pedal.

2. Briefly press the push button ignition switch.

The system does not function if:

• The passive key frequencies are jammed.

• The key battery has no charge.

If you are unable to start the engine, do the following:

144

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Open the floor console storage compartment lid.

2. With the buttons facing the rear of your vehicle and the key ring up, place the passive key into the backup slot.

3. With the key in this position, press the brake pedal then the power button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle.

Fast Restart

The fast restart feature allows you to restart your vehicle within 10 seconds of switching it off, even if it does not detect a valid passive key.

Within 10 seconds of switching your vehicle off, press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. After 10 seconds, you can no longer start your vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive key.

Once your vehicle starts, it remains running until you press the push button ignition switch, even if your vehicle does not detect a valid passive key. If you open and close a door while your vehicle is running, the system searches for a valid passive key.

Failure to Start

If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure:

For vehicles with automatic transmission, fully depress the brake pedal. For vehicles with manual transmission, fully depress the clutch pedal and apply the parking brake.

2. Shift into park (P) or neutral.

3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

4. Keep the accelerator pedal fully depressed and press the push button ignition switch until the engine starts.

Automatic Engine Shutdown

For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this feature automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do.

Automatic Engine Shutdown Override

Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown feature. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

145

Starting and Stopping the Engine

You can stop the shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following:

• Reset the timer by pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.

• Temporarily switch off the shutdown feature during the current ignition cycle

using the information display. See

General Information (page 87).

• Press OK or RESET to temporarily switch the feature off during the current ignition cycle.

Stopping the Engine When Your

Vehicle is Stationary

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, shift into park (P). For vehicles with a manual transmission, shift into first gear.

2. Turn the key to position 0 .

3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start

Shift into park (P).

2. Press the push button ignition switch.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and all warning lamps and indicators will be turned off.

Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes, the ignition and engine automatically shut down.

Stopping the Engine When Your

Vehicle is Moving

WARNING

Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

Put the transmission into neutral (N) and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmission, or first gear for vehicles with manual transmission and switch the ignition off.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start

Put the transmission into neutral (N) and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmission, or first gear for vehicles with manual transmission.

3. Press and hold the push button ignition switch until the engine stops, or press it three times within two seconds.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

146

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

WARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.

Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.

Important Ventilating Information

If you stop your vehicle and then leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following:

• Open the windows at least 1 in

(2.5 cm).

• Set your climate control to outside air.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE

Cold or Hot Engine

Switch the ignition on and wait until the glow plug indicator goes off.

2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

3. Start the engine.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the engine is starting will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on.

Note: When the temperature is below 5°F

(-15°C), you may need to crank the engine for up to 10 seconds.

Note: You can only operate the starter for a limited period of time.

Note: After a limited number of attempts to start your engine, the system will not allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.

Failure to Start

If the engine does not crank when the clutch pedal has been fully depressed and the ignition key is turned to position III .

Fully depress the clutch and brake pedals.

2. Turn the key to position III until the engine has started.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER

The filter forms part of the emissions reduction system on your vehicle. It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the exhaust gas.

Regeneration

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard.

Note: Avoid running out of fuel.

Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to the high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal.

Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust sound may be heard during the regeneration process.

147

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Note: After you have switched your engine off the fans may continue to run for a short period of time.

The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle requires periodic regeneration to maintain its correct function. Your vehicle will carry out this process automatically.

If your journeys meet one of the following conditions:

• You drive only short distances.

• You frequently switch the ignition on and off.

• Your journeys contain a high level of acceleration and deceleration.

You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the regeneration process:

• Drive your vehicle in more favorable conditions, which you will find at higher vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a main road or freeway for a minimum of 20 minutes. This drive may include short stops that will not affect the regeneration process.

• Avoid prolonged idling and always observe speed limits and road conditions.

• Do not switch the ignition off.

• Select a suitable gear to ideally maintain engine speed between 1500 and 3000 RPM.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Vehicles With a Turbocharger

WARNING

Do not switch the engine off when it is running at high speed. If you do, the turbocharger will continue running after the engine oil pressure has dropped to zero. This will lead to premature turbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until the engine has reached idle speed and then switch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

WARNINGS

Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury.

Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock.

Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F

(-18°C).

The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 220-240 volt AC electrical source.

We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation:

• Use an extension cord suitable for use outdoors and in cold temperatures. It should be clearly marked that it is suitable for use with outdoor appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord as possible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.

• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire.

148

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary.

The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation.

Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

149

Unique Driving Characteristics

AUTO-START-STOP

The system reduces fuel consumption and

CO2 emissions by shutting down the engine when your vehicle is idling, for example at traffic lights.

WARNINGS

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, move the transmission selector lever to position P before leaving your vehicle.

The engine may restart automatically if required by the system.

Switch the ignition off before opening the hood or carrying out any maintenance.

Always switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle, as the system may have shut down the engine but the ignition will still be live.

Note: The auto-start-stop indicator illuminates green when the engine shuts

down. See Warning Lamps and Indicators

(page 82). It flashes amber with a message

when the driver needs to shift to neutral or

press a pedal. See Information Messages

(page 96). If it illuminates grey the system

is not available.

Using Auto-Start-Stop Manual

Transmission

To Stop the Engine

Stop your vehicle.

2. Shift into neutral.

3. Release the clutch and accelerator pedal.

To Re-Start the Engine

Press the clutch pedal.

Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the system, move the transmission lever to neutral and release the clutch pedal during any stop of longer than three seconds.

Note: Start-stop also comes with stall recovery. If you fully depress the clutch pedal after stalling the engine, the engine automatically restarts.

Using Auto-Start-Stop Automatic

Transmission

To Stop the Engine

Stop your vehicle in drive (D).

2. Release the accelerator pedal.

3. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.

Note: The engine will also shut down if the gearshift lever is in park (P) or neutral (N) regardless of brake pedal position.

To Re-Start the Engine

Release the brake pedal or press the accelerator pedal.

Limitations of Use

The system may not shut down the engine under certain conditions, for example:

• Low engine operating temperature.

• To maintain the interior climate.

• The battery charge level is low.

• The outside temperature is too low or too high.

• Opening the driver door when in motion.

• When the driver safety belt is unfastened.

• The heated windshield is on.

150

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Unique Driving Characteristics

• During regeneration of the diesel particulate filter.

• Transmission is in Sport or Manual modes (automatic transmission only).

The system may automatically restart the engine under certain conditions, for example:

• To maintain the interior climate, for example air conditioning.

• The battery charge level is low.

• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in neutral.

• The heated windshield is turned on.

• When the driver safety belt is unfastened (automatic transmission only).

• The driver door is opened (automatic transmission only).

• Transmission is shifted to Sport or

Manual modes (automatic transmission only).

Switching the System On and Off

Note: For vehicles with auto-start-stop, the battery requirement is different. Replace it with one of exactly the same specification as the original.

When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on.

To switch the system off, press the switch and the word OFF illuminates. Press again to switch the system back on. The system only switches off for the current ignition cycle.

Note: If the system detects a malfunction, it turns off. The OFF lamp on the switch illuminates continuously. If this remains on after an ignition cycle, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: The system may not function if you leave electrical equipment connected with the ignition off.

151

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.

Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled.

Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity.

This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container.

Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.

When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck.

Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent.

The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation.

In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking

“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism.

Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result.

If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

152

Fuel and Refueling

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE

WARNINGS

Do not mix gasoline with oil, diesel or other liquids. This could cause a chemical reaction.

Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with additives containing other metallic compounds (e.g.

manganese-based). They could damage the emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel.

Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives or other engine treatments for normal vehicle use.

Use minimum 95 octane unleaded gasoline that meets the specification defined by EN 228 or the equivalent national specification.

Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol blends up to 10% (E5 and E10).

Long-Term Storage

Most gasoline contains ethanol. We recommend that you fill the fuel tank with fuel that does not contain ethanol if you intend to store your vehicle for more than two months. Alternatively, we recommend that you seek advice from an authorized dealer.

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

WARNINGS

Do not mix diesel with oil, gasoline or other liquids. This could cause a chemical reaction.

Do not add kerosene, paraffin or gasoline to diesel. This could cause damage to the fuel system.

WARNINGS

Use diesel that meets the specification defined by EN 590 or the relevant national specification.

Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel.

Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives or other engine treatments for normal vehicle use.

Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives to prevent fuel waxing.

Long-Term Storage

Most diesel fuels contain biodiesel. We recommend that you fill the fuel tank with fuel that does not contain biodiesel if you intend to store your vehicle for more than two months. Alternatively, we recommend that you seek advice from your dealer.

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL

LOCATION - VEHICLES WITH:

SPARE WHEEL

The fuel filler funnel is located in the left-hand side rear storage compartment.

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL

LOCATION - VEHICLES WITH:

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT

The fuel filler funnel is in the under floor storage compartment behind the right-hand front seat.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.

153

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:

• Add a minimum of 1.1 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. If your vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel may be required.

• You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container:

• Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it.

• Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it.

• Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel

Container

WARNINGS

Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel system filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.

Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.

WARNINGS

Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the plastic funnel

included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler

Funnel Location (page 153).

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following:

Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages and remove the fuel tank filler cap.

Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a fuel tank filler cap.

2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel tank filler pipe opening.

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container.

4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel tank filler pipe opening.

5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close the fuel tank filler door.

154

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling

6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.

Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during use, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard.

Driving with a Catalytic Converter

WARNINGS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for long periods.

Do not run the engine when a spark plug lead is disconnected.

231).

Do not push-start or tow-start your

vehicle. Use booster cables. See

Jump Starting the Vehicle (page

Do not switch the ignition off when driving.

REFUELING

WARNINGS

Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

WARNINGS

Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others.

Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling.

Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with the incorrect fuel. This may cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle

Warranty. Have your vehicle checked immediately.

When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.

If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel tank filler door briefly from a distance not less than 8 in (20 cm).

Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.

Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing.

Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler cap.

155

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling

Type 1: Left hand side - press the fuel tank filler door to open it.

Type 1: Right hand side - press the fuel tank filler door to open it.

Type 2: Left hand side - pull the fuel tank filler door to open it.

Type 2: Right hand side - pull the fuel tank filler door to open it.

Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it engages.

Note: When you insert the correct size fuel pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will open.

2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe opening.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

156

3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position

B when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

Fuel and Refueling

4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown.

5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and then slowly remove it.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

We derive CO2 and fuel consumption figures in laboratory tests according to

Regulation (EC) 715/2007 or CR (EC)

692/2008 and subsequent amendments.

They are intended as a comparison between makes and models of vehicles.

They are not intended to represent the real world fuel consumption you may get from your vehicle.

Real world fuel consumption is governed by many factors, for example driving style, high speed driving, stop-start driving, air conditioning usage, the accessories fitted, payload and towing.

The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined.

Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity due to the empty reserve still present in the fuel tank.

Filling the Fuel Tank

For consistent results when refueling:

• Switch the ignition off.

• Allow no more than two automatic shut-offs when refueling.

Results are most accurate when the refueling method is consistent.

Calculating Fuel Economy

Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is the engine break-in period). A more accurate measurement is obtained after

2,500 mi (4,000 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.

Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.

2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record the amount of fuel added.

3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.

157

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuel and Refueling

5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons used (For

Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled).

Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or freeway).

This provides an accurate estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.

In general, your vehicle will use more fuel in cold temperatures.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

158

Transmission

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Selecting Reverse Gear

Do not engage reverse gear when your vehicle is moving. This can cause damage to the transmission.

Selector Lever Positions

Raise the collar when you select reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGS

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure you shift the gearshift lever to park (P). Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously.

Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury.

Park

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

Sport mode

WARNING

Apply the brakes before shifting the gearshift lever to a forward or reverse gear. Keep the brakes applied until you are ready to move off.

Press the button on the front of the gearshift lever to shift to each position.

The gearshift lever position will be shown in the instrument cluster display.

Park (P)

WARNINGS

Shift the gearshift lever to park (P) only when your vehicle is stationary.

Apply the parking brake and shift the gearshift lever to park (P) before leaving your vehicle. Make sure that the gearshift lever is latched in position.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

159

Transmission

In this position, power is not transmitted to the driven wheels and the transmission is locked. You can start the engine with the gearshift lever in this position.

Note: A warning tone sounds if you open the driver door and you have not shifted the gearshift lever to park (P).

Reverse (R)

WARNINGS

Shift the gearshift lever to reverse

(R) only when your vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle speed.

Always come to a complete stop before shifting the gearshift lever out of reverse (R).

Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) to allow your vehicle to move backward.

Neutral (N)

In this position, power is not transmitted to the driven wheels but the transmission is not locked. You can start the engine with the gearshift lever in this position.

Drive (D)

Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy and smoothness.

Shift the gearshift lever to drive (D) to allow your vehicle to move forward and shift automatically through the forward gears.

The transmission will shift to the appropriate gear for optimum performance based on ambient temperature, road gradient, vehicle load and your input.

Sport Mode (S)

Switch on sport mode by shifting the gearshift lever to sport (S).

SelectShift Automatic™

Transmission

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift

Automatic transmission gearshift lever.

The SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you the ability to change gears up or down as desired.

In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may cause it to stall, SelectShift still automatically makes some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.

Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time as long as the

SelectShift determines that damage will not be caused to the engine from over-revving.

Note: Engine damage may occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting.

SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button.

If equipped with the toggle on the gearshift lever, press the + toggle switch on the side of the gearshift lever to activate SelectShift.

• Press the (+) button to upshift.

• Press the (-) button to downshift.

160

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Transmission

If equipped with steering wheel paddles, pull the + paddle on the steering wheel to activate SelectShift.

• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.

• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

The instrument cluster displays your currently selected gear. If a gear is requested but not available due to vehicle conditions (low speed, too high engine speed for requested gear selection), the current gear will flash three times.

Emergency Park Position Release

Lever

WARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working.

This procedure requires you to shift the gearshift lever out of park (P) causing your vehicle to roll. Make sure you fully set the parking brake before attempting to release the gearshift lever.

If you release the parking brake and the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working correctly. The system has detected a fault that requires service.

Note: For some markets this feature will be disabled.

Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents moving the gearshift lever from park (P) when the ignition is in the on position and the brake pedal is not pressed.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of park (P) position with the ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction may have occurred. It is possible that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating

properly. See Fuse Specification Chart

(page 233).

If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from park (P):

Remove the side panel on the right side of the gearshift lever.

2. Locate the access hole.

161

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Transmission

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern.

Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool) into the access hole and press the lever foreword while pulling the gearshift lever out of the park (P) position and into the neutral (N) position.

4. Remove the tool and reinstall the panel.

5. Start the vehicle and release the parking brake.

Automatic Transmission Adaptive

Learning

This feature may increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal and does not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process fully updates transmission operation.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow

Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

162

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

All-Wheel Drive

USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE

All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator.

Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off-road use. The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise similar to normal on-road driving conditions.

Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty.

Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display when an AWD

system fault is present See Information

Messages (page 96). An AWD system fault

will cause the AWD system to default to front-wheel drive only mode. When this warning message is displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer

Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display if the AWD system

has overheated See Information

Messages (page 96). This condition may

occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has been restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled, the warning message will turn off and normal AWD function will return.

Do not use a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided. If the mini-spare tire is installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This condition will be indicated by a warning in

the information display See Information

Messages (page 96). If there is a warning

message in the information display from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on. It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD system.

Driving In Special Conditions With

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway.

Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine.

Basic operating principles in special conditions

• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle.

• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

163

All-Wheel Drive

If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the

Pavement

• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.

• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

WARNINGS

Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is in

P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop button and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer.

Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

If your vehicle is equipped with

AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability

Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll

Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle.

Emergency Maneuvers

• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid

"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more.

Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.

• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs.

164

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

All-Wheel Drive

Sand

When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail.

Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand. This will cause the AWD system to overheat. After the system has cooled down, normal AWD function will return.

Under severe operating conditions, the A/C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine.

Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution.

Mud and Water

If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited.

When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.

Once through water, always try the brakes.

Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.

After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.

Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components.

Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.

If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and AWD PTU

(Power Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary.

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain

Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer.

Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down.

When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.

165

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

All-Wheel Drive

If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location.

Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating.

Do not descend in neutral; instead, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle.

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes.

Driving on Snow and Ice

WARNING

If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause driveline damage.

AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle.

Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.

Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop.

Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an

AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.

Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.

Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not

“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving

With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 168). for

more information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system (ABS).

Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford

Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.

166

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

All-Wheel Drive

Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks).

Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety.

Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway usage.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

167

Brakes

GENERAL INFORMATION

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, have it checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to

brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy

Wheels (page 260).

Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps may flash during heavy braking. Following this, your hazard lights may also flash when your vehicle comes to a stop.

See Warning Lamps and

Indicators (page 82).

Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over Accelerator

In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.

If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move the transmission to park (P), switch the engine off and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake Assist

Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal, and can reduce stopping distances in critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake System

This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective.

If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH

ANTI-LOCK BRAKES

Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal.

The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when:

• You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.

• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.

• You take corners too fast.

• The road surface is poor.

168

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Brakes

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

The electric parking brake replaces the conventional handbrake. The operating switch is located in the center console.

WARNING

Always set the parking brake and leave your vehicle with the transmission in park (P) (automatic transmission) or in first gear (1) or reverse

(R) (manual transmission).

Note: When you apply the electric parking brake in certain conditions, for example, on a steep hill, the electric parking brake may reapply the brakes within three to ten minutes.

Note: You may notice various noises when you apply and release the electric parking brake. This is normal and no cause for concern.

Parking On a Hill (Vehicles With a

Manual Transmission)

If you park your vehicle facing uphill, move the transmission to first gear (1) and turn the steering wheel away from the curb. If you park your vehicle facing downhill, move the transmission to reverse (R) and turn the steering wheel toward the curb.

Applying the Electric Parking brake

WARNING

The brake system warning lamp will flash during an emergency parking brake apply. If the brake system warning lamp continues to flash, there could be a problem with your electric parking brake.

Note: The brake system warning lamp will illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is turned off after the electric parking brake has been applied, or the electric parking brake has been applied after the ignition has been turned off.

Note: The electric parking brake will not automatically apply. You must apply the electric parking brake using the electric parking brake switch.

Pull the switch up to apply the electric parking brake.

The brake system warning lamp will flash for approximately 2 seconds and then illuminate to confirm that the electric

parking brake has been applied. See

Information Displays (page 87).

Apply the electric parking brake when the vehicle is moving

WARNINGS

Applying the electric parking brake while moving will result in use of the anti-lock braking system. Do not use the electric parking brake system when the vehicle is moving unless the normal brake system is unable to stop the vehicle.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

169

Brakes

WARNINGS

With the exception of emergency conditions (for example, the brake pedal does not work or is blocked), do not apply the electric parking brake while the vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road surfaces or weather conditions, emergency braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of control or off the road.

If you apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving, the brake system warning lamp will illuminate and a warning

chime will sound. See Information

Displays (page 87).

If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph

(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as long as the switch is pulled. Releasing or pressing the switch or pressing the accelerator pedal will stop the braking force.

Releasing the Electric Parking

Brake

You can release the electric parking brake either manually by pressing the switch or automatically.

Manual release

WARNING

If the brake system warning light remains illuminated or flashes after you have released the parking brake, there could be a problem with you braking system. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

You can manually release the electric parking brake by:

Turning the ignition on.

2. Pressing the brake pedal.

3. Pressing the electric parking brake switch.

When the electric parking brake is released, the brake system warning lamp will turn off.

Automatic release - drive away release

Your vehicle will automatically release the parking brake if all of the following conditions exist:

• The driver door is closed.

• The driver safety belt is fastened.

• The vehicle is accelerated.

• There are no faults detected in the parking brake system.

Note: If the electric parking brake warning lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking brake will not automatically release. You must release the electric parking brake using the electric parking brake switch.

Note: On manual transmission vehicles, if the transmission is in neutral (N) when you release the clutch pedal and press the accelerator pedal, the electric parking brake will release automatically.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

170

Brakes

Note: On manual transmission vehicles, you must fully press the clutch pedal before the drive away release feature will operate.

Drive as normal using the accelerator and clutch pedals and the electric parking brake will be automatically released.

The brake system warning lamp will go off to confirm that the electric parking brake has been released.

Note: The electric parking brake drive away release makes starting on a hill easier. This feature will release the parking brake automatically when the vehicle has sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To assure drive away release when starting uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly.

Driving with a Trailer

Depending on the slope and the weight of the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll backwards slightly when you start on a slope.

To prevent this from happening, do the following:

Pull the switch up and hold it in this position.

2. Drive your vehicle, then release the switch when you notice that the engine has developed sufficient driving force.

Battery With No Charge

WARNING

You will not be able to apply or release the electric parking brake if the battery is low or has no charge.

If the battery is low or has no charge, use jumper cables and a booster battery.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNINGS

The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely

parked may lead to a crash or injury. See

Electric Parking Brake (page 169).

You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system will turn off if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev the engine excessively. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake.

When the system is active, your vehicle remains stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal.

The system releases the brakes automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space.

Note: The system only functions when you bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.

Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) when facing downhill and first gear (1) when facing uphill.

171

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Brakes

Note: There is no warning light to indicate the system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist

Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal pressed.

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system activates automatically.

3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the slope without rolling away for about two to three seconds. This hold time automatically extends if you are in the process of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. The system releases the brakes automatically.

Note: When you remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the pedal again when the system is active, you will experience significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This is normal.

Switching the System On and Off

For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, you can turn the system on or off in the instrument display. The system will remember your setting even when you turn your vehicle off and back on.

Note: For vehicles with an automatic transmission, the system cannot be switched off.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

172

Traction Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction.

If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

In certain situations for example, stuck in snow or mud, turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power.

Depending on the type of system you have on your vehicle, you can either turn the system off using the information display or by pressing the button.

Switching the System Off Using the Information Display Controls

(If Equipped)

Your vehicle comes with this feature already enabled. If required, you can switch this feature off using the information

display controls. See (page 87).

Switching the System Off Using a

Switch

(If Equipped)

The button is located in the instrument panel.

Press the button. You will see a message in conjunction with an illuminated icon in the display. Press the button again to return the system to normal mode.

When you switch the traction control system off, stability control remains fully active.

System Indicator Lights and

Messages

WARNING

If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac system, the stability control light will illuminate steadily. Verify that the AdvanceTrac system was not manually disabled through the information display. If the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the stability system.

The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and stays on when you turn the traction control system off.

When you turn the traction control system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status.

173

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Stability Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.

Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the

AdvanceTrac system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac system activates, SLOW DOWN.

The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability

Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface.

The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides, curve control assists in vehicle handling in following the road during adverse maneuvering, roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover, and the traction control system helps avoid drive

wheel spin and loss of traction. See Using

Traction Control (page 173).

Vehicle without AdvanceTrac with RSC skidding off its intended route.

Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with

RSC maintaining control on a slippery surface.

174

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Stability Control

USING STABILITY CONTROL

AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability

Control™ (RSC®)

The system automatically activates when you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off, but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in reverse (R). You can also turn off the traction control portion of the

system independently. See Using

Traction Control (page 173).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

175

Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section. Sensing is only an aid for some

(generally large and fixed) objects when moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.

Certain objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and external motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system.

This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging your vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to the ground.

Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

Note: The sensing system cannot be turned

off when a MyKey is present. See (page

37).

Note: If you attach certain add-on devices such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing system may detect that add-on device and therefore provide warnings. It is suggested that you disable the rear sensing system when you attach an add-on device to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.

The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on.

The system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you

shift the transmission into reverse (R). See

display. See Information Messages

Note: On vehicles with front parking aid you can use the parking aid switch to switch the system off.

If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information

(page 96).

REAR PARKING AID

The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases.

When the obstacle is less than 12 in

(30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than

12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.

176

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Parking Aids

The indicator displays:

• As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon.

• If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are greyed out.

FRONT PARKING AID

The front sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P).

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper.

The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) :

• Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph

(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph

(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph

(5 km/h).

The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper.

Obstacle Distance Indicator

(If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display.

The distance indicator displays when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. There is decreased coverage area at the outer corners.

When your vehicle approaches an object, a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle moves closer to an object, the warning tone repeat rate increases. The warning tone sounds continuously when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front bumper.

Obstacle Distance Indicator

(If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display.

177

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Parking Aids

The indicator displays:

• As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon.

• If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are greyed out.

If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front sensing system provides audio warnings when your vehicle is moving and the detected obstacle is moving towards your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning will be stopped after 2 seconds.

If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual transmission), the front sensing system provides audio and visual warnings when your vehicle is moving below a speed of

7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located inside the detection area. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning will be stopped after 2 seconds and the visual indication stops after 4 seconds. If the obstacles detected are within 12 in

(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.

If the transmission is in neutral (N), the system provides visual indication only when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph

(12 km/h) or below and an obstacle is located inside the detection area. Once your vehicle is stationary, the visual indication will stop after 4 seconds.

SIDE SENSING SYSTEM

The side sensing system uses the front and rear side sensors to detect and map obstacles that are near to the sides of your vehicle.

Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection area without being detected and mapped by the front or rear side sensors will not be detected.

The side sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P).

Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from the sides of your vehicle.

When the system detects an object close to the side of your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. As the object comes closer to the side of your vehicle, the rate of the audible warning increases. The rate of the audible warning varies depending on whether the obstacle is inside or outside of the driving path of your vehicle.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

178

Parking Aids

Obstacle Distance Indicator

Equipped)

(If

The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display.

As the distance to the obstacle decreases, the indicator blocks illuminate and move toward the vehicle icon. If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks show greyed out.

When you shift to reverse (R), the side sensing system provides audible and visual distance indication when your vehicle is moving and obstacles are detected within

12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are detected within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle.

When you stop your vehicle the audible warning stops after two seconds.

Note: Visual distance indication remains on when the transmission is in reverse (R).

When you shift to drive (D) or any other forward gear, for example, low (L), sport

(S) or any forward gear in manual transmission, the side sensing system provides audible and visual distance indication when your vehicle is moving at

7 mph (12 km/h) or below and obstacles are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are detected within 12–24 in

(30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the audible warning stops after 2 seconds and the visual distance indication stops after 4 seconds.

Note: If the obstacle remains within 12 in

(30 cm) visual distance indication remains on.

If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side sensing system only provides visual distance indication when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for example when moving on a slope, and obstacles are detected within 12 in

(30 cm). When you stop your vehicle the visual distance indication stops after 4 seconds.

If the side sensing system is not available, the side distance indicator blocks will not be present.

The side sensing system is not available under the following condition:

• If you switch the traction control system off.

The side sensing system may not be available until you have driven approximately the length of your vehicle in order for the system to reinitialize if:

• You switch the ignition on, off and back on.

• Your vehicle remains stationary for over two minutes.

• The anti-lock brake system is activated.

• The traction control system is activated.

179

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Parking Aids

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST

Parallel Parking, Perpendicular

Parking, Park Out Assist

WARNINGS

You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. You are responsible at all times for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections.

Note: The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required by grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the active park assist button.

The system detects an available parallel or perpendicular parking space and automatically steers your vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to park your vehicle.

If you are uncomfortable with the proximity to any vehicle or object, you may choose to override the system.

Park Out Assist automatically steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking space

(hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to enter traffic.

Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not detect traffic alongside or behind your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.

The system may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions:

• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly worn more than the other tires.

• You use a unauthorized tire size.

• You try to park on a tight curve.

• Something passes between the front bumper and the parking space (a pedestrian or cyclist).

• The edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high off the ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).

• The weather conditions are poor

(heavy rain, snow, fog, etc).

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can affect the system's accuracy. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.

Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).

Do not use the system if:

• You have attached a foreign object

(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rear of your vehicle or close to the sensors.

• You have attached an overhanging object (surfboard) to the roof.

• A foreign object damages or obstructs the front or rear bumper or side sensors.

• The correct tire size is not in use on your vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).

Using Active Park Assist - Parallel

Parking

Press the button located on the center console near the gearshift lever or the right side of the center stack once.

180

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Parking Aids

When driving at a speed less than 22 mph

(35 km/h) the system automatically scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. The system displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it is searching for a parking space.

Use the direction indicator to select searching either to the left-hand side or right-hand side of your vehicle.

Note: If the direction indicators are not used, the system defaults to the passenger side of your vehicle.

Note: The system passively searches for parking spaces prior to pressing the button, so activating the system is still possible while passing a parking space.

When the system finds a suitable space, it displays a message and a tone sounds.

Stop your vehicle and follow the instructions on the screen. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may need to pull forward a short distance before the system is ready to park.

Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver.

Note: Active park assist may not detect street furniture and other items. You must make sure the selected space is suitable for parking.

Note: You should drive your vehicle within

5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to the other vehicles while passing a parking space.

Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space (for example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last one).

Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph

(35 km/h), the system shows a message to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.

Automatic Steering into Parking Space

Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted

(driver input), the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle.

When you shift the transmission into reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel

(and nothing obstructing its movement), your vehicle steers itself into the space.

The system displays instructions to move your vehicle back and forth in the space.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

181

Parking Aids

When you think your vehicle is properly parked, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied by a display message and a chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.

When automatic steering is complete, the system displays a message and a tone sounds, indicating that the active park assist process is finished. You are responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle.

Using Active Park Assist -

Perpendicular Parking

Press the button located on the center console near the gearshift lever or the right side of the center stack twice.

The system displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator to select searching either to the left-hand side or right-hand side of your vehicle.

Note: If you do not make a selection the system will default to the passenger's side.

When the system finds a suitable space, it displays a message and a tone sounds.

Stop your vehicle and follow the instructions on the screen. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may need to pull forward a short distance before the system is ready to park.

Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver.

Note: You should drive your vehicle within

4.9 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as possible to the other vehicles while passing a parking space.

182

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Parking Aids

Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space (for example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last one).

Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h), the system shows a message to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.

Automatic Steering into Parking Space

Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted

(driver input), the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle.

When you shift the transmission into reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel

(and nothing obstructing its movement), your vehicle steers itself into the space.

The system displays instructions to move your vehicle back and forth in the space.

When you think your vehicle is properly parked, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied by a display message and a chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.

Using Active Park Assist - Park Out

Assist

While your vehicle is at rest in a parallel parking space, press the active park assist button.

The system displays a message requesting an indication of direction. Use the direction indicator to signal which side of your vehicle you want to exit the parking space.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

183

Parking Aids

The system determines the clearance to the front and rear of your vehicle and automatically steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to enter traffic.

After the system has directed your vehicle past the adjacent vehicle or object, it guides you to take control of the steering to complete the exit from the parking spot.

The system may not function correctly if something passes between the front bumper and the parking space (a pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high off the ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).

Note: If the clearance in front of your vehicle allows easy departure, the Park Out

Assist feature might not be available.

Note: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle and making sure the path is clear prior to pulling into traffic.

Note: This system is not intended to assist in exiting perpendicular parking spaces, damages to your vehicle may occur.

Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted

(driver input), the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle.

Troubleshooting the System

Deactivating the Active Park

Assist Feature

Manually deactivate the system by:

• Pressing the active park assist button twice.

• Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver.

• Driving above approximately 22 mph

(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active park search.

• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during automatic steering.

• Switching off the traction control system.

Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system, such as:

• Traction control has activated.

• There is an anti-lock brake system activation or failure.

If a problem occurs with the system, a warning message displays accompanied by a tone. Occasional system messages may occur in normal operation. For recurring or frequent system faults, contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced.

The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

184

Parking Aids

The system does not offer a particular space

The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered senors can affect the system's functionality.

There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.

The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.

The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.

Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with reverse [R] selected).

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.

You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.

The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).

A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.

A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).

The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.

The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

185

Parking Aids

REAR VIEW CAMERA

(If Equipped)

WARNINGS

The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system.

Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop your vehicle.

Use caution when using the rear video camera and the luggage compartment door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the luggage compartment door is ajar.

Use caution when turning camera features on or off. Make sure your vehicle is not moving.

The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle.

During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle.

The camera is located on the luggage compartment door.

Using the Rear View Camera

System

The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R).

Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:

• Active guidelines: Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing.

• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you.

• Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer).

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the luggage compartment door or liftgate is open, no rear view camera features will display.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

186

Parking Aids

Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear when you connect the trailer tow connector.

The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions:

• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating.

• Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.

• The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned.

Camera Guidelines

Note: Active guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Active guidelines

Centerline

Fixed guideline: Green zone

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

Fixed guideline: Red zone

Rear bumper

Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If you change the steering wheel position while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight.

187

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Parking Aids

Always use caution while reversing.

Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.

Manual Zoom

WARNING

When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Note: When you enable manual zoom, only the centerline is shown.

Selectable settings for this feature are

Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.

This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse

(R).

Camera System Settings

To access any of the rear view camera system settings, make the following selections in the multifunctional display when the transmission is not in reverse (R):

Main Menu

Settings

Vehicle

Camera Settings

Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot

Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.

The system uses red, yellow and green highlights that appear on top of the video image when any of the sensing systems detect an object.

Rear Camera Delay

Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.

The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF.

When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until:

• Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases.

• You shift your vehicle into park (P).

188

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Cruise Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

(If

Equipped)

WARNINGS

Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.

Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.

When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes but a warning displays.

The cruise controls are on the steering wheel.

Switching Cruise Control On

Press and release the cruise control icon.

The indicator appears in the instrument cluster.

Setting the Cruise Speed

Drive to desired speed.

2. Press and release SET+ or SET.

3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Note: The indicator will change color.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph

(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving uphill.

Changing the Set Speed

• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET+ or SET.

• Press and hold SET+ or SET. Release the control when you reach the desired speed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET. The set speed will change in approximately

3 mph (5 km/h) increments.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set.

Canceling the Set Speed

Press and release CNCL . You will not erase the set speed.

Resuming the Set Speed

Press and release RES .

Switching Cruise Control Off

Press and release the cruise control icon, when the system is in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.

189

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Cruise Control

Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL

(If Equipped)

WARNINGS

Always pay close attention to changing road conditions when using adaptive cruise control. The system does not replace attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to the road may result in a crash, serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control is not a crash warning or avoidance system.

Adaptive cruise control does not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Adaptive cruise control does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road.

Adaptive cruise control does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

Do not use adaptive cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery.

This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.

Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.

Do not use the system when towing a trailer with brake controls.

Aftermarket trailer brakes will not operate when you switch the system on because the brakes are electronically controlled. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.

WARNINGS

Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.

Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The system is designed to help you maintain a gap from the vehicle in front of you. If there is no vehicle in front of you the system will maintain a set speed. The system is intended to provide enhanced operation of your vehicle when following other vehicles which are in the same lane and traveling in the same direction. You can select from one of four gap settings.

The system is based on the use of a radar sensor which projects a beam directly forward of your vehicle.

The adaptive cruise controls are on the steering wheel.

Switching the System On

Press and release the Adaptive Cruise

Control CNCL/OFF button.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

190

Cruise Control

The cruise control indicator, SET mph

(kph) , the current gap setting indicator and Standby displays in the instrument cluster.

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed

Drive to desired speed.

2. Press and release SET or RES+ .

3. The information display shows a green indicator light, current gap setting and desired set speed.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

5. When the system detects a vehicle in front of you, it will be displayed above the horizontal bars.

Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the set speed displayed in the information display may vary slightly from the speedometer.

Changing the Set Speed

• Press and release SET or RES+ . The set speed changes in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press and release SET or RES+ .

• Press and hold SET or RES+ . Release the control when you reach the desired speed.

The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active.

Canceling the Set Speed

Press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal for an extended period, or press and release the Adaptive Cruise Control

CNCL/OFF button. The last set speed displays with a strikethrough.

Resuming the Set Speed

Press and release RES+ . The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display while the system is active.

Switching the System Off

Press and release the Adaptive Cruise

Control CNCL/OFF button when the system is in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.

Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

191

Cruise Control

Following a Vehicle

WARNINGS

When following a vehicle, your vehicle does not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor does your vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death.

When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap.

The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.

Your vehicle maintains a constant gap behind the vehicle ahead until:

• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed.

• The vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view.

• The vehicle speed falls below 12 mph

(20 km/h).

• A new gap is set.

The system applies the brakes to slow your vehicle to maintain a safe gap from the vehicle in front. The maximum braking which the system can apply is limited. You can override the system by applying the brakes.

If the system predicts that its maximum braking level is insufficient, an audible warning sounds while the system continues to brake. The red warning bar appears on the windshield. You should take immediate action.

Note: The brakes may emit a sound when modulated by the adaptive cruise control system.

Setting the Gap

You can decrease or increase the gap between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you by pressing the gap control.

Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions.

The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the graphic. You can select from one of four gap settings.

Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore the distance will automatically adjust with your speed.

192

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Cruise Control

Adaptive cruise control gap settings

Set speed mph ( km/h)

Graphic display, bars indicated between vehicles

Time gap, seconds

Gap yd (m)

Dynamic behavior

62 (100)

1.4

31 (28)

43 (39)

Sport

Normal

62 (100) 3 1.8

55 (50) Normal

62 (100) 4 2.2

67 (61) Comfort

Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged each time you switch the ignition on.

Overriding the System

WARNING

Whenever the driver is overriding the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, the system does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead.

You can override the set speed and gap by pressing the accelerator pedal.

When you override the system, the green indicator light illuminates and the lead vehicle graphic does not show in the information display.

The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Automatic Cancellation

The system does not operate below

12 mph (20 km/h). An audible warning sounds and the automatic braking releases if the vehicle drops below this speed.

Automatic cancellation can also occur if:

• The tires lose traction.

• The engine speed is too low.

• You apply the parking brake.

Note: If the engine speed drops too low, the information display indicates low engine speed. Shift to a lower gear (manual transmission only) to avoid automatic cancellation.

Hilly Condition Usage

You should select a lower gear position when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades, for example in mountainous areas. The system needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating.

Note: An audible warning sounds and the system shuts down if it applies brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool down. The system functions normally again when the brakes have cooled down.

193

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Cruise Control

Detection Issues

WARNING

On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you.

Detection issues can occur:

With vehicles that edge into your lane that can only be detected once they have moved fully into your lane.

Motorcyclists may be detected late, or not at all.

With vehicles in front of you when going into and coming out of a bend. The detection beam will not follow sharp curves in the road.

In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and intervene if necessary.

If something hits the front of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

System Not Available

Conditions that can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested include:

• A blocked sensor.

• High brake temperature.

• A failure in the system or a related system.

Blocked Sensor

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

194

Cruise Control

A message displays if something obstructs the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor is located on the lower grille. The system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function when something obstructs the radar signals.

Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front protectors and aftermarket lights may also block the sensor.

The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is free from obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.

Swirling water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead.

It is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked. A false blocked condition self clears or clears after a key cycle.

Switching to Normal Cruise

Control

WARNING

Normal cruise control does not brake due to slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary.

The cruise control indicator light replaces the adaptive cruise control indicator light if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, the system does not automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking does not activate.

The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle.

You can manually change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

195

Driving Aids

SPEED LIMITER

(If Equipped)

Principle of Operation

WARNING

When you are going downhill, your speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the brakes but a warning will be given.

The system allows you to set a speed, to which your vehicle then becomes limited.

The set speed will become the effective maximum speed of your vehicle, but with the option to temporarily exceed this limit if required.

Using the System

Note: The set speed limit can be intentionally exceeded for a short period of time if required, for example when overtaking.

The system is operated by adjustment controls mounted on the steering wheel.

Switching the System On and Off

Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in standby mode. The information display will prompt you to set a speed. Press LIM

CNCL/OFF with the limiter in standby mode to turn the system OFF.

Manual Setting the Speed Limit

• Press SET- with the limiter in standby mode to set the limiter to the current vehicle speed.

• Press RES+ or SET- to select your desired speed limit. The speed is displayed in the information display and stored as the set speed.

• Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the limiter and place it in standby mode.

The information display will show the set speed greyed out.

• Press RES+ to resume the limiter. The information display will show the set speed.

Intentionally Exceeding the Set Speed

Limit

Depress the accelerator fully to temporarily turn the system off. The system will reactivate once your vehicle speed drops below the set speed.

System Warnings

If you accidently exceed the set speed, the set speed indicator in the information display will flash and you will hear an audible warning chime.

If you intentionally exceed the set speed, only the set speed indicator in the information display will flash.

Using the Intelligent Speed Limiter

(If Equipped)

The system allows you to automatically limit your vehicle speed to the speed limit that is detected by the Traffic Sign

Recognition system.

You can change the speed limiter mode between manual and intelligent in the

information display. See (page 87).

196

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

You can select a permanent set speed tolerance that is in addition to the detected speed limit through the tolerance menu in

the information display. See (page 87).

Switching the System On and Off

Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in standby mode. The information display will prompt you to set a speed. Press LIM

CNCL/OFF with the limiter in standby mode to turn the system OFF.

Setting the Speed Limit

• Press Res+ with the limiter in standby mode to set the limiter to the detected speed limit.

• Press SET- with the limiter in standby mode to set the limiter to the current vehicle speed.

• Press RES+ or SET- to gradually change the current set speed your desired speed limit. The speed is displayed in the information display and stored as the set speed.

• Press LIM CNCL/OFF to cancel the limiter and place it in standby mode.

The information display will show the set speed greyed out.

• Press RES+ to resume the limiter. The information display will show the set speed.

• The limit speed will automatically adapt to the speed limit detected by the Traffic Sign Recognition system.

Intentionally Exceeding the Set Speed

Limit

Depress the accelerator fully to temporarily turn the system off. The system will reactivate once your vehicle speed drops below the set speed.

System Warnings

If the set speed is automatically set to a lower value than your current vehicle speed, the set speed indicator in the information display will flash and you will hear an audible warning chime if you are continuously exceeding the set speed.

If you accidently exceed the set speed, the set speed indicator in the information display will flash and you will hear an audible warning chime.

If you intentionally exceed the set speed, only the set speed indicator in the information display will flash.

DRIVER ALERT

(If Equipped)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNING

The driver alert system is designed to aid you. It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment.

You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention.

Note: The system will store the on or off setting in the information display menu through ignition cycles.

Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will be active at speeds above 40 mph

(64 km/h). When below the activation speed, the information display will inform the driver that the system is unavailable.

Note: The system works as long as one lane marking can be detected by the camera.

Note: If the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged, the system may not function.

Note: The system may not be available in poor weather or other low visibility conditions.

197

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor.

If the system detects that your driving alertness is reduced below a certain threshold, the system will alert you using a chime and a message in the cluster display.

USING DRIVER ALERT

Switching the System On and Off

Switch the system on or off using the

information display. See (page 87).

When activated, the system will monitor your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings, and other factors.

System Warnings

Note: The system will not issue warnings below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).

The warning system has two stages. At first, the system issues a temporary warning that you need to take a rest. This message will only appear for a short time.

If the system detects further reduction in driving alertness, it may issue another warning that will remain in the information display for a longer time. You can press OK on the steering wheel control to clear the warning.

System Display

When active the system will run automatically in the background and only issue a warning if required. You can view the status at any time using the

information display. See (page 87).

The alertness level is shown by six steps in a colored bar.

The current assessment of your alertness is within a typical range.

The current assessment of your alertness indicates that you should rest as soon as safely possible.

The status bar will travel from left to right as the calculated alertness level decreases. As the rest icon is approached the color turns from green to yellow to red.

The yellow position indicates the first warning is active and the red position indicates the second warning is active.

Note: If you have recently received a warning; you should consider resting, even if the current assessment is within the typical range.

Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the road lane markings or if your vehicle speed drops below approximately 40 mph

(64 km/h), the alertness level will change to grey for a short time and the information display will inform you that the system is unavailable.

Resetting the System

You can reset the system by either:

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

198

Driving Aids

• Switching the ignition off and on.

• Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver’s door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM

(If

Equipped)

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

At all times you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required.

If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function.

In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray can all limit sensor performance.

Large contrasts in lighting can limit sensor performance.

The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.

The vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for inspection if damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor.

Note: The system works above 40 mph

(64 km/h).

Note: The system works as long as the camera can detect one lane marking.

Note: The system may not function if the camera is blocked or there is damage to the windshield.

Note: When Aid mode is on and the system detects no steering activity for a short period, the system will alert you to put your hands on the steering wheel. The system may detect a light grip or touch on the steering wheel as hands off driving.

The system notifies you to stay in your lane through the steering system and the instrument cluster display when the front camera detects an unintentional drift out of your lane is likely to occur. The system automatically detects and tracks the road lane markings using a camera mounted behind the interior rear view mirror.

Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system on or off setting is stored until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey is detected. If the system detects a MyKey it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.

Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the button will not affect the on or off status of the system.

Press the button located on the left steering wheel stalk to switch the system on or off.

System Settings

The system has optional setting menus

available. To view or adjust the settings,

See General Information (page 87). The

system stores the last-known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you turn on the system.

Mode: This setting allows you to select which of the system features you can enable.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

199

Driving Aids

Alert only – Provides a steering wheel vibration when the system detects an unintended lane departure.

Aid only – Provides an assistance steering torque input toward the lane center when the system detects an unintended lane departure.

Alert

Aid

Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering torque input toward the lane center. If your vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the system provides a steering wheel vibration.

Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate general zone coverage. They do not provide exact zone parameters.

Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibration used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does not affect the aid mode.

• Low

• Normal

• High

System Display

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

200

Driving Aids

•

When you switch on the system, an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will display in the information display. If you select aid mode when you switch on the system, a separate white icon will also appear or in some vehicles arrows will display with the lane markings.

When you switch off the system, the lane marking graphics will not display.

While the system is on, the color of the lane markings will change to indicate the system status.

Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side(s).

This may be because:

• Your vehicle is under the activation speed.

The turn indicator is active.

Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.

• The road has no or poor lane markings in the camera field-of-view.

• The camera is obscured or unable to detect the lane markings due to environmental conditions (significant sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog), traffic conditions (following a large vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the lane), or vehicle conditions (poor headlamp illumination).

See Troubleshooting for additional information.

Green: Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention, on the indicated side(s).

Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping aid intervention.

Red: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning.

The system can be temporarily suppressed at any time by the following:

• Quick braking.

• Fast acceleration.

• Using the turn signal indicator.

• Evasive steering maneuver.

Troubleshooting

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens

Quick intentional lane change

Staying too close to the lane marking

Driving at high speeds in curves

The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago

201

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?

Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)

Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa

Sudden offset in lane markings

ABS or AdvanceTrac activation

Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield

Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you

Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa

Standing water on the road

Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)

Lane width too narrow or too wide

Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement

Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads

Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the

Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds

Large road crown

Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure

If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

202

Driving Aids

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION

SYSTEM

Blind Spot Information System

(BLIS™) with Cross Traffic Alert

(If Equipped)

WARNING

To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the

Blind Spot Information System as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind

Spot Information System is not a replacement for careful driving.

The Blind Spot Information System aids you in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 23 ft

(7 m) beyond the bumper. The system alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving.

WARNING

To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space. Cross traffic alert is not a replacement for careful driving.

Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not prevent contact with other vehicles or objects; nor does it detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure

(fences, guardrails or trees). It only alerts you to vehicles in the blind zones.

Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone, the system may not trigger.

Using the Systems

The Blind Spot Information System turns on when you start the engine and you drive your vehicle forward above 5 mph

(8 km/h), it remains on while the transmission is in drive (D) or neutral (N).

If shifted into reverse (R), the system enters cross traffic alert mode. Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind Spot

Information System turns back on when you drive your vehicle above 5 mph

(8 km/h).

Note: The Blind Spot Information System does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).

Note: Cross traffic alert detects approaching vehicles and bicycles from up to 131 ft (40 m) away though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked.

Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

203

Driving Aids

Note: For manual transmission vehicles, the cross traffic alert will be active only if the transmission is in reverse (R). If your vehicle is rolling backward and the transmission is not in reverse (R) then cross traffic alert will not be active.

In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone coverage is nearly maximized.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

204

Driving Aids

Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely limited.

System Lights and Messages

Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present; this is rare and known as a false blockage warning.

A false blocked condition either self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.

The Blind Spot Information and cross traffic alert systems illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from. In addition, the yellow alert indicator will flash if the direction indicator is ON while a Blind Spot

Warning System alert is active.

Cross traffic alert also sounds a series of tones and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left.

System Sensors

WARNING

Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver, the number of missed objects will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the Blind Spot Information System as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind Spot

Information System is not a replacement for careful driving.

The system uses radar sensors which are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas, this can cause degraded system performance.

If the system detects a degraded performance condition, a message warning of a blocked sensor or low visibility will appear in the information display along with a warning indicator. You can clear the information display warning but the warning indicator will remain illuminated.

205

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

When you remove a blockage, you can reset the system in two ways:

• While driving, the system detects at least two objects.

• You cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on.

If the blockage is still present after the key cycle and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.

Reasons for messages being displayed

The radar surface is dirty or obstructed

The radar surface is not dirty or obstructed

Clean the fascia area in front of the radar or remove the obstruction.

Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it can clear the blocked state.

Heavy rainfall or snowfall interferes with the radar signals

No action required. The system automatically resets to an unblocked state once the rainfall or snowfall rate decreases or stops. Do not use the Blind

Spot Information System or cross traffic alert in these conditions.

System Limitations

The Blind Spot Information and cross traffic alert systems do have their limitations; situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build-up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection.

The following are other situations that may limit the Blind Spot Information System:

• Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very quickly.

• When several vehicles closely following each other pass through the blind zone.

The following are other situations that may limit the cross traffic alert system:

• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors.

• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 37 mph

(60 km/h).

• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph

(12 km/h).

• Backing out of an angled parking spot.

False Alerts

Note: If your vehicle has a factory equipped tow bar and it is towing a trailer, the sensors will detect the trailer and turn the Blind Spot

Information and cross traffic alert systems off to avoid false alerts. For non-factory equipped tow bars, you may want to switch the Blind Spot Information System off manually.

There may be certain instances when there is a false alert by either the Blind Spot

Information or the cross traffic alert system that illuminates the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are temporary and self-correct.

System Errors

If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the Blind Spot

Information System telltale will illuminate and a message will appear in the information display.

All other system faults will display only

with a message in the information display.

See Information Messages (page 96).

206

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

Switching the Systems Off and On

You can temporarily switch off one or both

systems in the information display. See

General Information (page 87). When

you switch off the Blind Spot Information

System, you will not receive alerts and the information display shows a system off message.

Note: The cross traffic alert system always turns on whenever the ignition is switched on. However, the Blind Spot Information

System will remember the last selected on or off setting.

You cannot switch one or both systems

off when MyKey is used. See Principle of

Operation (page 37).

You can also have one or both systems switched off permanently at an authorized dealer. Once switched off, only an authorized dealer can switch the system back on.

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION

Principle of Operation

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

At all times you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if required.

If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function.

Note: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray and large contrasts in lighting can all prevent the sensor from functioning correctly.

Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor.

Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit not approved by us, the system may not function correctly.

Note: Always fit Ford original parts when replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may reduce system performance.

Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice.

Note: The system may not detect all traffic signs and may read signs incorrectly.

Note: The system is designed to automatically detect traffic signs meeting the Vienna convention.

Note: Traffic sign data provided by the navigation system contains information integrated to the data carrier release.

There is a sensor mounted behind the interior rear view mirror. It continuously monitors road signs to inform you of the current speed limit and overtaking regulations.

The system automatically detects recognisable traffic signs, such as:

• Speed limit signs.

• No overtaking signs.

• Speed limit cancellation signs.

When the system recognises a traffic sign, it will be shown in the display.

Using the System

Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged during ignition cycles.

You can switch the system on and off using

the information display. See General

information display. See General

207

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

Setting the System Speed Warning

The system has a number of speed warning levels which can be set using the

system. See General Information

System Display

The system can display two traffic signs in parallel.

You can view the status at any time using the information display.

The system display is in four stages as follows:

All new recognizable traffic signs will appear brighter than the other traffic signs in the display.

2. After a predetermined time they will be shown normally.

3. After a predetermined distance they will be shown greyed out.

4. After another predetermined distance they will be deleted.

If the system detects a supplementary traffic sign, this sign is indicated as a box below the respective traffic sign. For example, when passing a reduced speed limit in wet road conditions sign.

If your vehicle has a navigation system, stored traffic sign data may influence the indicated speed limit value.

PRE-COLLISION ASSIST

WARNINGS

You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

To achieve full system performance you must break in the braking

(page 168). Failure to take care may result

in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system does not react to cyclists, animals, pedestrians at night, or vehicles that are driving in a different direction. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system does not operate during harsh acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury.

The system may or may not operate or may operate with reduced function during cold or severe weather conditions. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can influence the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

System performance may reduce in situations where the camera's detection capability is limited. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

208

Driving Aids

WARNINGS backgrounds, running pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians which cannot be distinguished from a group.

Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system cannot help prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed.

Using the Pre-Collision Assist

System

The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at speeds above approximately 3 mph

(5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).

If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours, or a pedestrian within your driving path, the system is design to provide three levels of functionality:

Alert

2. Brake Support

3. Active Braking

Alert : When activated, a red warning light flashes, an audible warning chime sounds and a warning message shows in the information display.

Brake Support : The brake support system assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by lightly applying the brakes. If the risk of collision further increases after the warning light illuminates, the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking. This may be apparent to the driver.

The system does not automatically activate the brakes, but if you press the brake pedal, the system may apply full force, even if the brake pedal is lightly pressed.

Active Braking : Active braking may apply if the system determines that a collision is imminent. The system may help the driver reduce impact damage or avoid the crash completely.

Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings.

Distance Alert

If the distance to the lead vehicle is small, the red warning light illuminates in the windshield.

Note: The red light bar is smaller and does not flash when Distance Alert is active.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

209

Driving Aids

Distance Indication

Distance indication is a function that provides a graphical indication of the time gap to other vehicles traveling in the same direction.

Speed

62mph

(100km/h)

62mph

(100km/h)

62mph

(100km/h)

Sensitivity

Normal

Graphics

Grey

Yellow

Red

Note: Distance Alert and Distance

Indication deactivates when adaptive cruise control is active. The distance indication graphics do not display in the information display unless adaptive cruise control is OFF.

Distance Gap

>25m between 17m and

25m

<17m

Time Gap

>0.9sec

between

0.6sec and

0.9sec

<0.6sec

Blocked Sensors

Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings

You can adjust the Alert and Distance Alert sensitivity to one of three possible settings by using the information display control.

information display controls. See General

You can switch the distance alert and indication function off using the

If required, you can switch active braking off using the information display controls.

on the information display. See General

Note: Active braking automatically turns on every time you switch the ignition on.

210

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

If a message regarding a blocked sensor or camera appears in the information display, the radar signals or camera images are obstructed. The radar sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille. With an obstructed radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not function and cannot detect a vehicle ahead. With the front camera obstructed, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the system performance on moving vehicles reduces. The following table lists possible causes and actions for when this message displays.

Cause

The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display.

Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that there is no obstruction.

Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals.

The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve.

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals.

The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve.

Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact.

The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some way.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.

Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.

The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect that there is no obstruction.

Note: Proper system operation requires a clear view of the road by the camera. Have any windshield damage in the area of the camera's field of view repaired.

Note: If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

211

Driving Aids

Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat at the camera or a potential misalignment condition, a message may display in the information display indicating temporary sensor unavailability. This message deactivates automatically when operational conditions are corrected (for example, when the ambient temperature around the sensor decreases or the sensor automatically recalibrates successfully).

FRONT VIEW CAMERA

WARNING

The camera system is a supplement system that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out the windows and checking the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

Note: The area displayed on the screen may vary according to your vehicle's orientation or road condition.

Note: The front view camera will switch off if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

(10 km/h). You will have to switch the system back on by using the enable button once below the speed threshold.

The camera button is located on the audio unit.

Camera Views

Press the camera button to toggle between different views.

• Front Normal View: Provides an image of what is directly in front of your vehicle.

• Front Split View: Provides an extended view of what is in front of your vehicle.

Access this view by pressing the camera button from the Front Normal

View screen.

DRIVE CONTROL

Driver Select Suspension

Driver select suspension delivers a unique driving experience through a suite of sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.

These systems continuously monitor your driving inputs and the road conditions to optimize ride comfort, steering and handling.

The front view camera is located in the grille.

Using the Front View Camera

The front view camera provides an image of the area in front of your vehicle.

To use the front video camera system, place the transmission in any gear except reverse (R). An image of the front of your vehicle appears once you press the camera enable button and your vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).

212

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Aids

Driver select suspension consists of the following systems:

• Continuously controlled damping dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers stiffness in real time to match the road surface and driver inputs. This system continuously monitors your vehicle’s motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension position, load, speed, road conditions, and steering to adjust the suspension damping for optimal vehicle control.

• Electronically power-assisted steering adjusts steering effort and feel based on your vehicle speed and your inputs.

You can configure which of the modes are active when your vehicle is in (D) drive or in (S) sport. The configuration remains active until modified from the main menu

on the information display. See General

Modes:

• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed driving experience, maximizing comfort.

Your steering effort decreases and the suspension movement is more fluid.

Comfort mode is ideal when you desire enhanced traveling comfort.

• Normal – Delivers a balanced combination of comfortable, controlled ride and confident handling. This mode provides an engaging drive experience and a direct connection to the road without sacrificing any of the composure demanded from your vehicle.

• Sport – Provides a sportier driving experience. The suspension stiffens, with an emphasis on handling and control. The engine responds more directly to your inputs. Sport mode is ideal for use during more spirited driving.

Adaptive Steering

You can configure which of the modes are active when your vehicle is in (D) drive or in (S) sport. The configuration remains active until modified from the main menu

See Vehicle Identification Plate

Modes:

• Normal – Default factory setting.

• Sport – Slightly higher effort required for steering with more road force felt through the steering wheel.

Note: The Drive Control has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation. Certain types of system errors will gray out the mode selections within the information display, preventing you from changing states when the gear position is changed. Other types of errors will produce a temporary message that states a malfunction. If either condition persists for multiple key cycles, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

213

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Load Carrying

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS

Use load securing straps to an approved standard, e.g. DIN.

Make sure that you secure all loose items properly.

Place luggage and other loads as low and as far forward as possible within the luggage or loadspace.

Do not drive with the luggage compartment or rear door open.

Exhaust fumes may enter your vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum front and rear axle loads for your vehicle.

(page 284).

Do not allow items to contact the rear windows.

Note: When loading long objects in to your vehicle, for example pipes, timber or furniture be careful not to damage the interior trim.

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

REAR UNDER FLOOR

STORAGE

In-Floor Storage - Second Row

In-floor storage is located behind the second row of seats in the cargo area. Lift the handle to open.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

214

Load Carrying

Load Floor Storage

(If Equipped)

Raise the loadspace floor to gain access to the storage compartment.

CARGO NETS

WARNING

This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision or heavy braking.

Cargo Net - Cargo Floor Net

(If

Equipped)

The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area. Attach the net to the anchors provided. Repeat the attachment on both sides of the vehicle.

Cargo Net - Loadnet

(If Equipped)

Note: The cargo net can only be placed behind the second row seat.

The cargo net cannot be used in conjunction with a tonneau cover.

215

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Installing the net

Load Carrying

Push the ends of the upper bar toward each other and insert them into the retainers on the headliner. Push the bar forward into the narrow section of the retainers.

3. Tighten the belts.

Removing the net

2. Attach the net to the luggage anchor

points. See Luggage Anchor Points

(page 214).

Release the belts.

2. Remove the net from the luggage anchor points.

3. Remove the upper bars.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

216

Load Carrying

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGS

Make sure that the posts are properly latched in mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is not securely installed.

Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.

Use the cargo shade to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.

Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the mounting features located behind the rear seat on the rear trim panels to install the cargo shade.

To operate the cargo shade:

Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade rearward.

2. Secure both ends of the support rod into the retention slots located on the rear quarter trim panels.

ROOF RACKS AND LOAD

CARRIERS

WARNINGS

If you use a roof rack, the fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher and you may experience different driving characteristics.

Read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions when you are fitting a roof rack.

When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

The maximum recommended load, evenly distributed on the roof rack, is:

• 165 pounds (75 kilograms) for vehicles without a moonroof

• 132 pounds (60 kilograms) for vehicles with a moonroof.

Note: Never place loads directly on the roof panel. The roof panel is not designed to directly carry a load.

For correct roof rack system function, you must place loads directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. When using the roof rack system, we recommend you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle.

Make sure that you securely fasten the load. Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

217

Load Carrying

Towbar Carriers

When using a towbar attached carrier, consider the following:

• Do not exceed the maximum vertical weight on the towball (weight of the carrier plus weight of the load).

• Pay attention to the carrier manufacturer's specifications.

• If you are using a bike carrier, the maximum number of allowed bikes is three, with a maximum allowed weight of 130 lb (60 kg).

• Load the heaviest item closest to the vehicle.

DOG GUARD

WARNING

Leave at least 0.4 in (1 cm) space between the dog guard and the seats in front of it.

Installing behind the front seats

2. Attach the dog guard to the lower anchor points using the supplied handwheels. Do not tighten the handwheels.

Push the ends of the bar on the grille toward each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof. Push the bar forward into the narrow section of the retainers.

218

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Load Carrying

Installing behind the rear seats

3. Attach the grille to the lower bar with the supplied handwheels. Do not tighten the handwheels.

4. Tighten the handwheels at the lower anchor points.

5. Tighten the handwheels at the grille-lower bar attachment points.

Push the ends of the bar on the grille toward each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof. Push the bar forward into the narrow section of the retainers.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

219

Load Carrying

2. Remove the screw from each of the

luggage anchor points. See Luggage

Anchor Points (page 214).

3. Attach the floor bracket to the luggage anchor point and secure with the new supplied screws.

4. Attach the dog guard lower bar bracket to the floor bracket with handwheel.

5. Tighten the handwheels.

Remove in the reverse order.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

220

Towing

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGS death.

Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h).

This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or

Do not exceed the maximum gross train weight stated on your vehicle identification plate. This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious

personal injury or death. See Vehicle

Identification Plate (page 284).

Do not exceed the maximum permissible trailer nose weight

(vertical weight on the tow ball) as stated in the vehicle specification chart.

This could result in the loss of vehicle

control, serious personal injury or death.

See Capacities and Specifications

(page 279).

trailer. This could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.

The anti-lock braking system does not control the overrun brake on the

When towing a trailer:

• Obey country specific regulations for towing a trailer.

• Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) even if a country allows higher speeds under certain conditions.

• Place loads as low as possible and central to the axle of your trailer. If you are towing with an unladen vehicle, place the load in your trailer toward the nose, within the maximum nose load,

as this gives the best stability. See

Capacities and Specifications (page

279).

• The trailer nose weight (vertical weight on the tow ball), is essential for the driving stability of your vehicle and trailer.

• The vertical weight on the tow ball should be at least 4% of the trailer weight and not exceed the maximum

permissible weight. See Capacities and Specifications (page 279).

• Reduce speed immediately if the trailer

shows any sign of swaying. See Trailer

Sway Control (page 222).

• Use a low gear when descending a steep downhill gradient.

Note: The maximum permissible trailer nose weight on the trailer identification plate is the trailer manufacturer’s testing value. The vehicle maximum permissible trailer nose weight may be lower.

The stability of your vehicle to trailer combination is very much dependent on the quality of the trailer.

Towing a trailer changes the vehicle handling characteristics and increases stopping distances. Adapt your speed and driving behavior to the load of the trailer.

The gross train weight stated on the vehicle identification plate applies for road gradients up to 12% and altitudes up to

3,280 ft (1,000 m) when towing a trailer.

In mountainous regions, the engine performance decreases due to lower air density with increasing altitude. In high altitude regions above 3,280 ft (1,000 m), you must reduce the stipulated maximum permitted gross train weight by 10% for every extra 3,280 ft (1,000 m).

Note: Not all vehicles are suitable or approved to have tow bars fitted. See an authorized dealer for further information.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

221

Towing

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL

If the trailer begins to sway, the stability control warning lamp flashes and a message appears in the information display. The system applies the brakes to the individual wheels and reduces engine torque to aid vehicle stability.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Check the vertical weight on the tow

ball and trailer load distribution. See

Capacities and Specifications (page

279). See Load Carrying (page 214).

Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it begins.

Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.

Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed is too high, the system may turn on multiple times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.

TOW BALL

WARNINGS

An audible warning tone sounds when the tow ball arm is not in the fully stowed position or in proper towing position. If the audible warning tone does not sound when the tow ball arm moves or when the system switches on, do not use the tow bar. See an authorized dealer.

Do not touch the tow ball arm when it is moving.

Make sure there are no obstacles preventing the tow ball arm from moving.

Note: We recommend keeping the tow ball arm in the stowed position when you are not using it. In addition, consider local regulations and insurance terms.

Tow ball arm.

13-pin trailer socket.

Swiveling the Tow Ball Arm

Note: Do not attach any plug to the 13-pin trailer socket.

Note: Make sure the vehicle battery has a full charge.

Note: The vehicle has to be stationary for the tow ball arm to operate.

Note: If something is blocking the tow ball arm during its swivel process, the system tries to reverse. If the tow ball arm stops before it is fully in towing position or stowed position, restart the swivel process by pressing the button twice.

Swiveling the Tow Ball Arm Out

Note: If the tow ball arm does not operate, but you hear an audible double tone (low pitch followed by a high pitch), switch on the ignition for 10 seconds, and then press the brake pedal and try operating the tow ball arm again.

Press the button. An audible double tone (low pitch followed by a high pitch) sounds to let you know the system is operating.

222

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Towing

2. Press the button again within four seconds to swivel the tow ball arm. A series of audible tones sounds and the

LED flashes while the tow ball arm swivels.

3. When the tow ball arm finishes swiveling, the LED stops flashing and an audible double tone (high pitch followed by a low pitch) sounds.

The tow ball arm is ready for use when it finishes swiveling into the towing position.

Swiveling the Tow Ball Arm In

Before swiveling the tow ball arm in:

• Unhitch the trailer or dismantle load carriers and their attachments.

• Dismantle attachments for tracking stabilization.

• Remove the plug for the trailer power supply and the adapter from the trailer socket. Failure to do so may cause damage to the bumper when the tow ball arm swivels into its stowed position.

To start swiveling the tow ball arm in, press the swivel button twice within four seconds.

The tow ball arm swivels into the stowed position automatically.

Tow Ball Arm Fault Conditions

If the LED on the swivel button is rapidly flashing and an audible tone sequence

(high pitch) sounds, repeat the swivel process. If this does not resolve the problem, see an authorized dealer.

A message may appear in the information

display. See Information Messages

(page 96).

Driving with a Trailer

WARNINGS

In the event of a vehicle breakdown, disconnect the trailer before towing the vehicle.

If any of the conditions below cannot be met, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by a properly trained technician. Before starting your journey, make sure that the tow ball arm is properly locked.

Check that:

• There is a last audible low pitch tone when the locking procedure finishes.

• The tow ball arm properly locks. Make sure it does not move when jerked.

Tow Ball Bike Carrier

Check the vertical weight on the tow ball.

See Load Carrying (page 214).

Maintenance

Note: The towing hitch and control unit are maintenance-free. Do not grease or oil these components.

Note: Do not attempt to service the towing hitch. Only the manufacturer should carry out repairs or dismantle the hitch.

Note: When cleaning the vehicle with a steam jet, do not direct the high-pressure jet directly onto the swivel joint of the tow ball arm and socket. After cleaning the vehicle, unplug the connector or open the trailer socket to make sure no water entered.

If water is present, dry the socket.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

223

Towing

TOWING POINTS

WARNING

The towing eye has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the towing eye is fully tightened.

Front Towing Eye

Space is provided in the under floor storage compartment behind the front seats.

You must carry the towing eye in your vehicle at all times.

Remove the cover and install the towing eye.

Rear Towing Eye

Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar, you cannot install the towing eye at the rear of your vehicle. Use the tow bar to tow other vehicles.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON

FOUR WHEELS - AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

WARNINGS

You must switch the ignition on when your vehicle is being towed. Failure to follow this warning could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

You must make sure the transmission selector lever is placed in position N . Failure to follow this warning could damage the transmission and may lead to a crash or injury.

The brake and steering assistance will not operate unless the engine is running. Press the brake pedal harder and allow for increased stopping distances and heavier steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury.

If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock, make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position before you tow.

Too much tension on a tow rope could cause damage to your vehicle or the vehicle that is towing.

Emergency Towing

If your vehicle is disabled without access to wheel dollies, a car-hauling trailer, or a flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat-towed with all wheels on the ground.

You may do this under the following conditions:

• Your vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward direction.

• The transmission selector lever is placed in position N . If the transmission gear shift lever cannot be moved to position N , it may need to be

overridden. See Transmission (page

159).

224

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Towing

• Maximum speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).

• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Note: If you need to exceed a speed of

30 mph (50 km/h) and a distance of 50 mi

(80 km) while towing, you must lift the drive wheels clear of the ground.

Note: We recommend you do not tow with the drive wheels on the ground. However, if it is required to move the vehicle from a dangerous location, do not tow your vehicle faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or farther than 50 mi (80 km).

WARNING

In the event of a mechanical failure of the transmission, do not use individual axle carriers. All wheels must be lifted clear of the ground on a level platform.

Drive off slowly and smoothly without jerking the vehicle that is being towed.

You must only use the towing eye that was

delivered with your vehicle. See Towing

Points (page 224).

Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be placed on the same side. For example; right hand rear towing point to right hand front towing point.

You must use a tow rope or rigid towing bar that is of the correct strength for the weight of the towing vehicle and the vehicle that is being towed.

Note: Using a rigid towing bar is the safest way to tow a vehicle.

The weight of the vehicle that is being towed must not exceed the weight of the towing vehicle.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON

FOUR WHEELS - MANUAL

TRANSMISSION

WARNINGS

You must switch the ignition on when your vehicle is being towed. Failure to follow this warning could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

The brake and steering assistance will not operate unless the engine is running. Press the brake pedal harder and be aware of increased stopping distances and heavier steering.

If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed.

Too much tension on a tow rope could cause damage to your vehicle or the vehicle that is towing.

When towing your vehicle you must select neutral. Failure to follow this warning could damage the transmission and may lead to a crash or injury.

Drive off slowly and smoothly without jerking the vehicle you are towing.

You must only use the towing eye that was

delivered with your vehicle. See Towing

Points (page 224).

Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be placed on the same side. For example; right hand rear towing point to right hand front towing point.

You must use a tow rope or rigid towing bar that is of the correct strength for the weight of the towing vehicle and the vehicle that is being towed.

The weight of the vehicle that is being towed must not exceed the weight of the towing vehicle.

225

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). See

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels

(page 224).

Towing

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

226

Driving Hints

BREAKING-IN

Tires

WARNING

New tires need to be run-in for approximately 300 miles (500 kilometers). During this time, you may experience different driving characteristics.

Brakes and Clutch

WARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch if possible for the first 100 miles (150 kilometers) in town and for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers) on freeways.

Engine

WARNING

Avoid driving too fast during the first

1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine.

Vehicles With a Diesel Engine

During the first 2000 miles (3000 kilometers), you may notice a ticking sound when your vehicle slows down. This is due to adjustments of your new diesel engine and is normal.

REDUCED ENGINE

PERFORMANCE

WARNING

Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and cause the engine to shut down completely.

If the engine coolant temperature gauge needle moves to the upper limit position,

the engine is overheating. See Gauges

(page 79).

You must only drive your vehicle for a short distance if the engine overheats. The distance you can travel depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain. The engine will continue to operate with limited power for a short time.

If the engine temperature continues to rise, the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.

The air conditioning will switch off and the engine cooling fan will operate continually.

Reduce your speed gradually and stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Switch the engine off immediately to prevent severe engine damage.

3. Wait for the engine to cool down.

4. Check the coolant level. See Engine

Coolant Check (page 248).

5. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ECONOMICAL DRIVING

The following will help to improve fuel consumption.

Tire Pressures

Check your tire pressures regularly to optimize fuel economy. For best results

use the economy pressures. See Tire

Pressures (page 276).

Gear Shifting

Use the highest drivable gear appropriate for the road conditions.

227

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Hints

Anticipation

Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance to other vehicles without the need for heavy braking or acceleration.

Efficient Speed

Higher speeds use more fuel. Reduce your cruising speed on open roads.

Accessories

Try not to add unnecessary accessories to the exterior of your vehicle. If you use a roof rack, remember to fold it down or remove it when not in use.

Electrical Systems

Switch off all electrical systems when not in use, for example air conditioning. Make sure you unplug any accessories from the auxiliary power points when not in use.

COLD WEATHER

PRECAUTIONS

The functional operation of some components and systems can be affected at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNING

Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle.

Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage.

Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle.

When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.

Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so:

• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work.

• Check that the horn works.

• Check that the exterior lights work.

• Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

WARNINGS

Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

Pedals that cannot move freely can injury.

cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal

228

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Driving Hints

WARNINGS

Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position.

Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.

Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.

Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement.

Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control.

To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in.

To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

229

Roadside Emergencies

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The hazard warning button is located on the instrument panel. Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

Press the button to turn on the hazard warning function, and the front and rear direction indicators will flash.

Press the button again to turn them off.

Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.

Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, the hazard warning flashers may flash if you brake heavily.

FIRST AID KIT

You can stow the first aid kit in the right-hand side rear storage compartment.

WARNING TRIANGLE

You can stow the warning triangle in the rear load floor storage compartment.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNING

Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury. Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact will cause a shutoff.

Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles equipped with a key system:

Switch off the ignition.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel pump.

For vehicles equipped with a push button start system:

Press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition.

2. Press the brake pedal and press the

START/STOP button to switch on the ignition.

3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition.

4. You can either attempt to start the engine by pressing the brake pedal and the START/STOP button, or switch on the ignition only by pressing the

START/STOP button without pressing the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the fuel system.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart.

Once your vehicle determines that the systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart.

Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact an authorized dealer.

230

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Roadside Emergencies

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGS

Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.

Connect batteries with only the same nominal voltage.

Always use booster cables with insulated clamps and adequate size cable.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery from your vehicle’s electrical system.

To Connect the Booster Cables

Positive connection cable

Negative connection cable

Position the vehicles so that they do not touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and any electrical equipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal of vehicle A (cable C).

Flat battery vehicle

Booster battery vehicle

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

231

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of vehicle B to the ground connection of vehicle A (cable D).

WARNINGS

Do not connect directly to the negative (–) terminal of the flat battery.

Make sure that the cables are clear of any moving parts and fuel delivery system parts.

To Start the Engine

Run the engine of vehicle B at a moderately high speed.

2. Start the engine of vehicle A.

3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of three minutes before disconnecting the cables.

Roadside Emergencies

WARNING

Do not switch the headlamps on when disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM

The system flashes the direction indicator lamps in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.

The lamps turn off when:

• You press the hazard control button.

• You press the panic button (if equipped) on the remote entry transmitter.

• Your vehicle runs out of power.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

232

Fuses

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Power Distribution Box

WARNINGS

Always disconnect the battery before servicing high-current fuses.

To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.

The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads.

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some features will need to

be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery

(page 250).

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

25A

15A

Protected components

Wiper motor.

Starter relay.

Rear wiper.

Rain sensor

233

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

—

20A

—

20A

—

20A 3

15A

10A

—

20A

10A 1

10A

15A

10A

15A

Protected components

Blower motor relay.

Power point 3 - Back of console.

Auxiliary heater #2 relay.

Powertrain control module - vehicle power

Powertrain control module relay.

Power point 1 - driver front.

Powertrain control module - vehicle power

Not used (spare).

Run-start relay.

Power point 2 - console.

Power point 4 - luggage compartment.

Not used (spare).

Run-start electronic power assist steering.

Run/start lighting.

Run/start transmission control.

Transmission oil pump start/stop.

Air conditioner clutch solenoid.

Run-start.

Blind spot information system.

Rear view camera.

Adaptive cruise control.

234

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating

10A

—

10A

—

15A 1

—

10A

—

10A

Protected components

Heads-up display.

Voltage stability module.

Run-start 7.

Run-start anti-lock brake system.

Run-start powertrain control module.

Not used.

Rear washer pump.

Not used.

Electronic fan 1 relay.

A/C clutch relay.

Electric steering column lock.

Not used.

Electronic fan 2 relay

Electric fan 2 and 3 relay.

Headlamp washer relay.

Horn relay.

Fuel pump relay.

Not used (spare).

Heated washer nozzle.

Not used.

Alternator sensor.

235

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Micro fuse.

Dual micro fuse.

M-type fuse.

Fuse amp rating

10A

20A

20A 1

10A

—

10A 1

Protected components

Brake on/off switch.

Horn.

Diesel fuel heater.

Power transfer unit fan.

Not used.

Power seats.

Fuel operated heater.

Power Distribution Box - Bottom

There are fuses located on the bottom of the fuse box. To access the bottom of the fuse box, do the following:

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

236

Release the two latches, located on both sides of the fuse box.

Fuses

2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box from the cradle.

3. Move the fuse box toward the center of the engine compartment.

4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box to access the bottom side.

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

20A

30A 1

40A

50A

Protected components

Headlamp washer.

Diesel vaporizer.

Fuel pump feed.

600W Electronic fan 3.

600W Electronic fan 1.

Left hand side windshield defrost.

Body control module 1.

237

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

25A

30A

20A 1

40A

50A

40A

30A

30A 1

60A

30A

20A

30A

30A 1

20A

30A

40A

40A 1

40A

60A

25A

30A

Protected components

600W Electronic fan 2.

Auxiliary heater #3.

Front heated seat.

Right hand side windshield defrost.

Body control module 2.

Heated rear window.

Anti-lock brake system valves.

Passenger seat.

Auxiliary heater #2.

Rear power seats.

Rear heated seats.

Driver seat module.

Auxiliary heater #1.

Transmission oil pump.

Climate control seat module.

Trailer tow module.

Blower motor.

Power liftgate module.

220 volt inverter.

Anti-lock brake system pump.

Wiper motor #1.

Starter solenoid.

238

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

M-type fuse.

J-type fuse.

Fuse amp rating

20A

–

50A

Protected components

Fuel fire heater.

Not used.

Auxiliary blower motor.

Note: It may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece.

Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel

The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering column.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

239

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

10A

7.5A

20A

10A

7.5A

10A

15A

7.5A

Protected components

Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome, liftgate).

Memory seats, lumbar, power mirror.

Driver door unlock.

Aftermarket electronic trailer brake on/off switch.

Ignition switch.

Push-button ignition switch.

Heated seat relay coil.

Not used (spare).

Keypad.

Power liftgate module.

Not used.

Climate control.

Steering wheel column lock.

Cluster.

Datalink logic.

Not used.

Datalink gateway module.

Child lock.

Liftgate release.

Not used (spare).

Ignition.

Push button stop start switch.

Passenger airbag disabled indicator.

Transmission range indicator.

240

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Fuse amp rating

7.5A

10A

20A

15A

20A 1

30A

20A

30A 1

30A

15A

10A

30A

Protected components

Not used (spare).

Humidity and in–car temperature sensor.

Blind spot information system.

Rear video camera.

Adaptive cruise control.

Occupant classification sensor.

Delayed accessory (power inverter logic, moonroof logic).

Central lock unlock.

Driver door (window, mirror).

Front passenger door (window, mirror).

Moonroof.

Amplifier.

Rear driver side door (window).

Rear passenger side door (window).

Not used (spare).

Global positioning system.

Display.

Voice control.

Adaptive cruise control.

Radio frequency receiver.

Radio.

Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36,

37, circuit breaker).

Restraints control module.

Auto-dimming rear view mirror.

Heated seat.

All-wheel drive.

241

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Fuses

Fuse or relay number

Micro fuse.

Dual micro fuse.

Fuse amp rating

15A

30A

Protected components

Voltage stability module logic power.

Not used (spare).

CHANGING A FUSE

Fuses

WARNING

Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating.

Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.

If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. A break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

242

Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly.

They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle.

To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy.

If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle.

Precautions

• Do not work on a hot engine.

• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

Working with the Engine Off

Set the parking brake and shift to park

(P).

2. Switch off the engine.

3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine On

WARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

Set the parking brake and shift to park

(P).

2. Block the wheels

OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD

Opening the Hood

Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left-hand side of the instrument panel.

2. Slightly lift the hood.

3. Release the hood latch by pushing the secondary release lever to your right-hand side.

243

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

4. Open the hood. Support the hood with the strut.

Closing the Hood

Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly after use.

2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under its own weight for the last

8–12 in (20–30 cm).

Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly closed.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 248).

Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 247).

Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

244

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 250).

Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 233).

Air filter assembly.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 250).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 248).

Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 247).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).

Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 250).

Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 233).

Air filter assembly.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 250).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

245

Maintenance

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 248).

Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 247).

Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 249).

Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 250).

Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 233).

Air filter assembly.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 250).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

246

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L

ECOBOOST™

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L

DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

Minimum.

Maximum.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L

ECOBOOST™

Minimum.

Maximum.

Minimum

Maximum

ENGINE OIL CHECK

Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.

2. Check the oil level before starting the engine, or switch the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan.

3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.

If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add

oil immediately. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 285).

Note: Make sure that the oil level is between the minimum and the maximum marks.

Note: Do not use oil additives or other engine treatments. Under certain conditions they may cause engine damage.

Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately

3,000 mi (5,000 km).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

247

Maintenance

Adding Engine Oil

WARNINGS

Only add oil when the engine is cold.

If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down.

Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.

Remove the engine oil filler cap. See

Maintenance (page 243).

2. Add engine oil that meets Ford

specifications. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 285).

3. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.

Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

WARNINGS

Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot.

Only add coolant when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down.

Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician.

Undiluted coolant is flammable and may ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty, add

coolant immediately. See Capacities and

Specifications (page 279).

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

Adding Engine Coolant

Remove the filler cap.

2. Add engine coolant to the MAX mark, do not overfill.

3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.

Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water or prediluted engine coolant that

meets the correct specification. See

Capacities and Specifications (page 279).

Note: In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location.

Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilution of engine coolant can cause engine damage, such as corrosion, overheating or freezing.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

248

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

FLUID CHECK

Note: Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.

The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.

Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid at the correct service interval. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.

Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

WARNINGS

Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.

Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death.

Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician.

WARNINGS

A fluid level between the MAX and

MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately.

Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.

See Capacities and Specifications

(page 279).

CLUTCH FLUID CHECK -

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

The clutch and brake systems share the

same fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid

Check (page 249).

249

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID CHECK

When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer fluid and water to help prevent freezing in cold weather and improve the cleaning capability. For information on fluid dilution, refer to the product instructions.

Note: The reservoir supplies the front and rear washer systems.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNINGS

Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of

15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

WARNINGS

For vehicles with Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement is different.

You must replace the battery with one of exactly the same specification.

The battery is located in the engine

compartment. See Under Hood

Overview (page 244).

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free battery. It does not require additional water during service.

If your vehicle battery has a cover, make sure you correctly install it after cleaning or replacing the battery.

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry and the battery cables tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If any corrosion is present on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water.

We recommend that you disconnect the negative battery cable terminal from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period.

To maintain correct operation of the battery management system, if you add any electrical devices to your vehicle, do not connect the ground connection directly to the negative battery terminal. A connection at the negative battery terminal can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation.

Note: Electrical accessories or components added to your vehicle by you or an authorized dealer, may adversely affect battery performance, durability and the performance of other electrical systems on your vehicle.

250

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

If a replacement battery is required, we recommend you use a Ford replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of your vehicle.

If you disconnect or replace the battery and your vehicle has an automatic transmission, transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the transmission may shift firmly when first driven. This is normal operation while the transmission fully updates its operation to optimum shift feel.

Remove and Reinstall the Battery

To disconnect or remove the battery, do the following:

Apply the parking brake and switch the ignition off.

2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for example lights and radio.

3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before disconnecting the battery.

4. Disconnect the negative battery cable terminal first.

5. Disconnect the positive battery cable terminal last.

6. Remove the battery securing clamp.

Remove the battery.

8. Install in the reverse order.

The engine management system has a power hold function and remains powered for a period after you switch the ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting the battery without waiting can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Before reconnecting the battery, make sure the ignition remains switched off.

Note: If you only disconnect the negative battery cable terminal, make sure it is isolated or placed away from the battery terminal to avoid un-intended connection or arcing.

Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals are fully tightened.

Note: If you disconnect or replace the battery, you must reset the clock and the pre-set radio stations once the battery is reconnected.

Battery Disposal

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries.

CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness.

Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

251

Maintenance

CHANGING THE WIPER

BLADES

Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the

wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper

Blades (page 251). If that does not resolve

the issue, install new wiper blades.

Service Position

Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached.

Set the windshield wipers in the service position to change the wiper blades. The windshield wipers return to the starting position when you switch the ignition on.

Switch the ignition off.

2. Move the wiper arms to the service position manually.

Note: You cannot move the wiper arms to the service position manually when you switch the ignition on.

Note: You can use the service position to provide easier access to the wiper blades for freeing them from snow and ice. Make sure the windshield is free from snow and ice before you switch the windshield wipers on.

Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades

Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm.

Lift the wiper arm and then press the wiper blade locking buttons together.

2. Remove the wiper blade.

3. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place.

Note: Make sure the windshield is clean before using new wiper blades.

Changing the Rear Window Wiper

Blade

Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm.

Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached.

Lift the wiper arm.

252

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

2. Remove the wiper blade.

3. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place.

Note: Make sure the rear window is clean before using a new wiper blade.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

Open the hood. See Opening and

Closing the Hood (page 243).

2. Remove the screws.

3. Pull the headlamp as far as possible towards the front of the vehicle to disengage it from the lower fixing point.

4. Lift the outer side of the headlamp and remove it.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

253

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

Maintenance

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGS

Switch the lamps and the ignition off.

Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury.

Bulbs become hot when in use. Let them cool down before you remove them.

Use the correct specification bulb. See

Bulb Specification Chart (page 257).

The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

Headlamp

Side lamps.

Headlamp high beam.

Headlamp low beam.

Front direction indicator.

Front Side Lamp

2. Carefully remove the cover.

3. Depress the tabs on the socket and remove the socket and bulb together.

4. Remove the bulb holder by pulling it straight out.

Headlamp Low Beam

2. Carefully remove the cover.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Headlamp High Beam

2. Carefully remove the cover.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Front Direction Indicator

auxiliary power point. See Auxiliary

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.

Front Fog Lamp

Note: To remove the front fog lamp bulb, access the underside of your vehicle.

254

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

Rear Direction Indicator

Disconnect the electrical connector.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

LED Lamps:

LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

The following lamps are LED:

• Daytime running lamp.

• Rear lamp.

• Brake lamp.

• Central high mounted brake lamp.

Carefully remove the cover.

2. Remove the screws that secure the lamp assembly.

3. Remove the lamp.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

5. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.

Reversing Lamp

Open the liftgate.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

255

Maintenance

2. Carefully remove the cover.

5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Remove the wing nut.

4. Remove the lamp.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

256

6. Remove the bulb holder by pulling it straight out.

License Plate Lamp

Maintenance

Rear Fog Lamp

Note: To remove the rear fog lamp bulb, access the underside of your vehicle.

Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the lamp.

2. Remove the lamp.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

2. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Exterior Lamps

Lamp

Front side lamp.

Front direction indicator.

Daytime running lamps.

Headlamp low beam.

Headlamp high beam.

Cornering lamps.

Front fog lamp.

Side direction indicator.

Brake and rear lamp.

Central high mounted brake lamp.

Specification

W5W

PY21W

LED

H15

H11

WY5W

LED

Power (Watt)

LED

257

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Maintenance

Lamp

Rear direction indicator.

Rear fog lamp.

Specification

PY21W

P21W

Reversing lamps.

W16W

License plate lamp.

W5W

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Power (Watt)

Interior Lamps

Glove compartment lamp.

Interior lamp.

Map lamp.

Lamp Specification

LED

Vanity Mirror Lamp.

LED

Luggage compartment lamp.

LED

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Power (Watt)

LED

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

258

Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

Note: If you use a car wash with a waxing cycle, make sure that you remove the wax from the windshield and the wiper blades.

Note: Prior to using a car wash facility check the suitability of it for your vehicle.

Note: Some car washes use water at high pressure. Due to this, water droplets may enter inside your vehicle and could also damage certain parts of your vehicle.

Note: Remove the aerial before using an automatic car wash.

Note: Switch the heater blower off to prevent contamination of the fresh air filter.

We recommend that you wash your vehicle with a sponge and lukewarm water containing a car shampoo.

Cleaning the Headlamps

Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them.

Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry.

Cleaning the Rear Window

Note: Do not scrape the inside of the rear window or use abrasives or chemical solvents to clean it.

Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp chamois leather to clean the inside of the rear window.

Cleaning the Chrome Trim

Note: Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents. Use soapy water.

Note: Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended.

Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may cause damage over a period of time.

Body Paintwork Preservation

WARNINGS

Do not polish your vehicle in strong sunshine.

Do not allow polish to touch plastic surfaces. It could be difficult to remove.

Do not apply polish to the windshield or rear window. This could cause the wipers to become noisy and they may not clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax the paintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be covered by your warranty.

Safety Belts

Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical solvents to clean them.

Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate the safety belt retractor mechanism.

Clean them with interior cleaner or water applied with a soft sponge. Let them dry naturally, away from artificial heat.

Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD

Screens and Radio Screens

Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean the instrument cluster screens, LCD screens or radio screens. These cleaning products can damage the screens.

259

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Vehicle Care

Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.

Rear Windows

Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to clean the interior of the rear windows.

Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the interior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT

DAMAGE

You should repair paintwork damage caused by stones from the road or minor scratches as soon as possible. A choice of products are available from an authorized dealer.

Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

Always read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the products.

CLEANING THE ALLOY

WHEELS

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers.

Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period of time.

Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.

Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.

This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.

Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers.

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you:

• Clean them weekly with the recommended wheel and tire cleaner.

• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation.

• Rinse them thoroughly with a pressurized stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process.

We recommend that you use Ford service wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Using other non-recommended cleaning products can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

260

Wheels and Tires

GENERAL INFORMATION

A decal with tire pressure data is located in the driver’s door opening.

Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive your vehicle and when the tires are cold.

Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to optimize fuel economy.

Note: Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage your vehicle and will make the National Type

Approval invalid.

Note: If you change the diameter of the tires from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the engine management system reprogrammed.

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT

Your vehicle may not have a spare wheel and tire. In these cases it will be supplied with a temporary mobility kit which will only repair one damaged tire.

The kit is located in the underfloor stowage compartment between the first and second row seats, on the right hand side of your vehicle.

General Information

WARNINGS

Depending on the type and extent of tire damage, some tires can only be partially sealed or not sealed at all.

Loss of tire pressure can affect vehicle handling, leading to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use the temporary mobility kit on a previously damaged tire. For example, when a tire has been driven under inflated.

WARNINGS

Do not use the temporary mobility kit on run flat tires.

Do not use the temporary mobility kit to repair the sidewall of a damaged tire.

The temporary mobility kit seals most tire punctures with a diameter of up to ¼ in (6 mm) to temporarily restore mobility.

You must observe the following rules when using the temporary mobility kit:

• Drive with caution and avoid making sudden steering or driving maneuvers especially if your vehicle is heavily loaded or towing a trailer.

• Only continue your journey to the next vehicle or tire dealer or drive a maximum distance of 125 mi (200 km).

• Do not exceed a maximum speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

• Keep the temporary mobility kit out of the reach of children.

• Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is between -30° and 70° C (-22° and

158° F).

• Do not use the temporary mobility kit on T-type (mini spare) tires.

Using the Temporary Mobility Kit

WARNINGS

Park your vehicle so that you do not obstruct the flow of traffic or place yourself in any danger and set up a warning triangle.

Compressed air can act as an explosive or propellant.

Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended while in use.

261

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

WARNINGS

Do not keep the compressor operating for longer than 10 minutes.

You must only use the temporary mobility kit for the vehicle with which it was supplied.

Before you use the temporary mobility kit:

• Apply the parking brake.

• Do not attempt to remove foreign material that is penetrating the tire, for example, nails or screws.

• Leave the engine running while the temporary mobility kit is in use. If your vehicle is in an enclosed or poorly ventilated area use the temporary mobility kit with the engine switched off.

• You must replace the sealant bottle with a new one before the expiry date which is printed on the top of sealant bottle.

• Inform all vehicle users that a tire has been repaired using the temporary mobility kit. Make them aware of the special driving conditions that apply.

Inflating the Tire

WARNINGS

Check the sidewall of the tire prior to using the temporary mobility kit. If there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage do not attempt to inflate the tire.

Do not stand directly beside the tire while the compressor is operating.

Watch the sidewall of the tire. If any cracks, bumps or similar damage appears, switch off the compressor immediately and deflate the tire using the pressure relief valve B.

WARNINGS

The sealant contains natural rubber latex. Avoid contact with skin or clothing. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact a physician.

If the tire inflation pressure does not reach the recommended pressure within 10 minutes, the tire may have suffered excessive damage, making a temporary repair impossible. Do not continue driving with this tire.

Screwing the sealant bottle onto the bottle holder will pierce the seal of the sealant bottle. Do not unscrew the sealant bottle from the bottle holder prior to completing a temporary repair as the sealant will escape.

If you experience heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior or noises while driving, reduce your speed and drive with caution to a place where it is safe for you to stop your vehicle. Recheck the tire and its pressure. If the tire pressure is less than 45 psi (3 bar) or if there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage visible, do not continue driving with this tire.

262

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

Protective cap.

Pressure relief valve.

Hose.

Pressure gauge.

Power plug with cable.

Compressor switch.

Label.

Sealant bottle.

Open the lid of the temporary mobility kit.

2. Peel off the label G showing the maximum permissible speed of

50 mph (80 km/h) from the casing and attach it to the instrument panel in the driver’s field of view. Make sure the label does not obscure anything important.

3. Take the hose C and the power plug with cable E out of the temporary mobility kit.

4. Screw the hose C onto the sealant bottle.

5. Remove the valve cap from the damaged tire.

6. Remove the protective cap A from the sealant bottle hose and screw the hose firmly onto the valve of the damaged tire.

Make sure that the compressor switch

F is in position 0.

8. Insert the power plug E into the

Power Points (page 139).

9. Start the engine.

10.

Move the compressor switch F to position 1.

11.

After a minimum of two minutes move the compressor switch F to position 0 and unscrew the hose C from the sealant bottle. Unscrew the sealant bottle hose from the tire valve.

12.

Screw the hose C onto the tire valve and move the compressor switch F to position 1.

13.

Inflate the tire for no longer than 10 minutes or to the recommended inflation pressure. Move the compressor switch F to position 0 and check the current tire pressure with pressure gauge D. Unscrew the hose C from the tire valve.

14.

Remove the power plug E from the auxiliary power point.

15.

Make sure the temporary mobility kit, the bottle lid and the orange cap are stored safely, but still easily accessible in your vehicle. The temporary mobility kit will be required again when you check the tire pressure.

16.

Immediately drive approximately six miles (10 kilometers) so that the sealant can seal the damaged area.

263

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

Note: When pumping in the sealant through the tire valve, the pressure may rise up to

87 psi (6 bar) but will drop again after about

30 seconds.

WARNING

If you experience heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior or noises while driving, reduce your speed and drive with caution to a place where it is safe for you to stop your vehicle. Recheck the tire and its pressure. If the tire pressure is less than the recommended pressure or if there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage visible, do not continue driving with this tire.

Checking the Tire Pressure

WARNING

Before driving make sure the tire is adjusted to the recommended

inflation pressure. See Tire

Pressures (page 276). Monitor the tire

pressure until the sealed tire is replaced.

Stop your vehicle after driving about six miles (10 kilometers). Check, and where necessary, adjust the pressure of the damaged tire.

2. Attach the temporary mobility kit and check the tire pressure from the pressure gauge D.

3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tire is more than the recommended pressure, adjust it to the recommended

pressure. See Tire Pressures (page

276).

4. Follow the inflation procedure once again to inflate the tire.

5. Check the tire pressure again from the pressure gauge D. If the tire pressure is too high, deflate the tire to the specified pressure using the pressure relief valve B.

6. If the tire pressure is less than the recommended pressure, repeat steps

13 to 16 and steps 1 to 5 (Checking the

Tire Pressure).

Once you have inflated the tire to its correct tire pressure, move the compressor switch F to position 0, remove the power plug E from the auxiliary power point, unscrew the sealant bottle hose, fasten the valve cap and replace the protective cap A.

8. Drive to the nearest tire specialist to get the damaged tire replaced. Before the tire is removed from the wheel, inform the tire specialist that the tire contains sealant. Renew the sealant bottle as soon as possible after it has been used once.

Note: The temporary mobility kit only provides an emergency repair. Regulations concerning tire repair after using the temporary mobility kit may differ from country to country. You should consult a tire specialist for advice.

Empty sealant bottles can be disposed of together with normal household waste.

Return remaining sealant to an authorized dealer or dispose of it in compliance with local waste disposal regulations.

TIRE CARE

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance, or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.

264

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly.

A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand, size, or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

Rotating your tires at regular intervals of between 3000 and 6000 miles (5000 and

10000 kilometers) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tread life.

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Tire Rotation

Front-wheel drive and All-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at left of diagram).

Non-directional tires

Directional tires

USING SUMMER TIRES

Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads.

Summer tires do not have the Mud and

Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, we do not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to about 40ºF (5ºC) or below (depending on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, we recommend using

Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or

Snow tires.

Always store your summer tires indoors at temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The rubber compounds used in these tires lose flexibility and may develop surface cracks in the tread area at temperatures below

20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm them in a heated space to at least 40ºF

(5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle with the tires installed, or checking tire

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

265

Wheels and Tires inflation. Do not place tires near heaters or heating devices used to warm the room where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.

Always inspect the tires after storage periods and before use.

USING WINTER TIRES

If winter tires are used you must inflate them to the same tire pressures as those

listed in the tire pressure table. See Tire

Pressures (page 276).

Note: Winter weather driving capability will be reduced if a dissimilar size spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGS

Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).

Do not use snow chains on snow-free roads.

If your vehicle has wheel trims, remove them before fitting snow chains.

Note: The anti-lock braking system will continue to operate normally.

Only certain chains or snow cables have been approved as safe for use on your vehicle with the following wheel and tire combination(s): 17” wheels with 235/55R17 tires. You should only install chains or cables sized at 10 mm or less in dimension as measured on the sidewall of your tire.

Only use snow chains on the front wheels.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM

WARNING

The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

You must check the tire pressures

(including the spare tire where applicable) every two weeks when the tires are cold.

You must inflate the tires to the correct pressure.

See Wheels and Tires (page 261). The tire

pressures are also on the tire inflation pressure label (located on the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar).

As a driver assistance feature, your vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring system. A warning lamp will illuminate when one or more of the tires are significantly under-inflated. If the low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates, you should stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, check the tires and inflate them to the correct pressure.

Driving on under-inflated tires can:

• Cause them to overheat.

• Lead to tire failure.

• Reduce fuel efficiency.

• Reduce tire life.

• Affect vehicle handling or stopping ability.

266

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

The system is not a substitute for correct tire maintenance.

You must maintain the correct tire pressures, even if low tire pressure has not illuminated the warning lamp.

To check the tire pressures through the information display, scroll to:

Message Action and Description

Driver Assist

Tire Monitor

Tire Pressure

Press the OK button.

The tyre pressure graphic displays.

The tire pressure monitoring system has a system malfunction indicator to warn you when the system is not operating correctly.

The malfunction indicator and low tire pressure warning lamp have a combined function. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately one minute and then remain illuminated. This sequence will occur every time you switch the ignition on while the malfunction remains. The system has detected a fault that requires service.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressures. A malfunction may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of a replacement tire or wheel that prevents the system from functioning correctly.

Always check the tire pressure monitoring system malfunction warning after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle. Make sure the replacement tires or wheels allow the system to continue to function correctly. See When the Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section.

How Temperature Affects the Tire

Pressures

Under normal driving conditions tire pressures may increase by up to 4 psi

(0.3 bar) from a cold start situation.

If the vehicle is stationary overnight and the temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, tire pressures may decrease by up to 3 psi (0.2 bar) when there is a drop in the ambient temperature of 31°F (17°C) or more. The system detects this pressure decrease as being significantly below the correct inflation pressure and the warning lamp illuminates.

Changing Tires With a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

You should always have tires serviced by an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

267

Wheels and Tires

Note: Each road wheel and tire is fitted with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor attaches to the valve stem. The tire covers the pressure sensor and it is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor.

Understanding the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System

The system measures the pressure in the four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle.

The system detects this lower pressure as being significantly below the correct inflation pressure and the warning lamp illuminates. You must inflate the tires to the correct pressure.

When the Temporary Spare Tire is

Installed

If you need to replace a road wheel and tire with the temporary spare wheel, the system will continue to identify a defect.

This is to remind you to repair the damaged road wheel and tire and refit the repaired road wheel and tire assembly to your vehicle. To restore the correct operation of the system, you must have the repaired road wheel and tire assembly refitted to your vehicle.

When You Believe the System is Not

Operating Correctly

The main function of the system is to warn you when the tire pressures are low. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of operating correctly.

See the following chart for information concerning the system:

When Inflating the Tires

When inflating the tires the system may not respond immediately to the air added to the tires.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

268

Wheels and Tires

System Warning Lamps

Warning lamp Description

Solid warning lamp Tire(s) under-inflated

Action

Make sure tires are at the correct

pressure. See Wheels and Tires

(page 261). The tire pressures are also

on the tire inflation pressure label

(located on the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar).

2. After inflating the tires to the correct pressure you must carry out the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System Reset

Procedure in this chapter.

Solid warning lamp initially followed by a flashing warning lamp

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and refit the repaired road wheel and tire assembly to your vehicle to restore the correct operation of the system.

Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction

If the tires are correctly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, the system has detected a fault that requires service.

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and refit the repaired road wheel and tire assembly to your vehicle to restore the correct operation of the system.

Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction

If the tires are correctly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, the system has detected a fault that requires service.

If the Warning Lamp is On:

Check each tire to verify that none are flat.

2. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.

3. Check the tire pressures and inflate all the tires to the correct pressure.

4. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure.

269

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNINGS

The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used when temporary mobility is required (due to a flat tire) and a mini spare tire is not available. If you must use a sealant, the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer.

If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer

function. See Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (page 266).

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on your vehicle.

If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.

Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the

tire pressure monitoring system sensors.

See Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(page 266). Replace the spare tire with a

road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire

Assembly Information

WARNING

Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size, or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types:

T-Type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter 'T' for tire size and may have "Temporary Use Only" molded in the sidewall.

Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND

TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE

ONLY.

When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:

• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Load the vehicle beyond the maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety

Compliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.

• Use snow chains on the tires of the axle fitted with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.

270

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

• Use commercial car washing equipment.

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance.

• Comfort and noise.

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.

• Winter weather driving capability.

• Wet weather driving capability.

• All-wheel driving capability.

Full-sized dissimilar spare without label on wheel

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:

• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).

• Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time.

• Use commercial car washing equipment.

• Use snow chains on the tires of the axle fitted with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance.

• Comfort and noise.

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.

• Winter weather driving capability.

• Wet weather driving capability.

• All-wheel driving capability.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, additional caution should be given to:

• Towing a trailer.

• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.

• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.

Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change Procedure

WARNINGS

When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent your vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if your vehicle is in park (P).

To help prevent your vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of your vehicle) to the tire being changed.

If your vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured.

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under your vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire.

Note: Passengers should not remain in your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

271

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

Vehicles equipped with a full-size spare tire:

Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers.

2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. For vehicles with a manual transmission, place the transmission in reverse (R) after the engine is turned off.

6. To remove the wrench from the jack, turn the hex nut on the jack counterclockwise. This will lower the jack and loosen the mechanical lock.

Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.

3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.

For example, if the left front tire is flat, block the right rear wheel.

4. Remove the lug wrench and vehicle jack from the under floor storage compartment.

5. Remove the carpeted wheel cover and spare tire.

8. The vehicle jacking points are shown above, and are depicted on the yellow warning label on the jack.

9. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Once the flat tire is raised above the ground, remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.

Note: If equipped with full wheel covers with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or damage to the wheel cover may occur.

10.

Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.

11.

Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

272

Wheels and Tires

12.

Remove the jack and fully tighten the

lug nuts in the order shown. See Lug

Nuts (page 278).

13.

Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.

14.

To store the folded wrench on the jack, engage the bracket of the jack base on the wrench as shown. Swing the wrench upwards and adjust the height of the jack until the pin engages the hole. Tighten the hex nut clockwise by hand until secure.

15.

Unblock the wheel.

Vehicles equipped with a mini-size spare tire:

Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flasher.

2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. For vehicles with a manual transmission, place the transmission in reverse (R) after the engine is turned off.

273

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Wheels and Tires

3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.

For example, if the left front tire is flat, block the right rear wheel.

4. Remove the lug wrench and vehicle jack from the under floor storage compartment.

5. To remove the wrench from the jack, turn the hex nut on the jack counterclockwise. This will lower the jack and loosen the mechanical lock.

6. Locate the winch access hole in the rear storage compartment and insert the lug wrench.

Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise and lower the spare tire until it can slide rearward with the cable fully extended. Remove and save the plastic stability cup from the retainer cable.

Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel.

8. If the spare tire is equipped with a tether, lift the spare tire on its end and remove the lug nut from the spare tire tether.

9. If you are not replacing the mini-spare tire back to the underbody storage area, raise the winch cable up to the fully installed position.

Note: The full sized road tire will not fit under your vehicle. Store and secure it inside the vehicle.

10.

Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

274

Wheels and Tires

14.

Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

11.

The vehicle jacking points are shown above, and are depicted on the yellow warning label on the jack.

12.

Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Once the flat tire is raised above the ground, remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.

Note: If equipped with full wheel covers with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or damage to the wheel cover may occur.

13.

15.

Remove the jack and fully tighten the

lug nuts in the order shown. See Lug

Nuts (page 278).

16.

Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench away. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

275

Wheels and Tires

17.

18.

Unblock the wheel.

To install the mini-spare tire back into the underbody storage area, perform the following steps.

Place the tire on end with the valve stem facing rearward, away from the vehicle.

2. If equipped, place the tether into the bolt holes in the wheel and attach the lug nut using the lug wrench.

3. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing down.

4. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the center of the wheel.

5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original position underneath your vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire winch clutch will click twice when the spare tire is fully seated in the underbody storage area.

6. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame. Push against the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under your vehicle. Loosen and re-tighten if necessary. Make sure that the tire does not contact the bumper.

Note: Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.

Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure or any time that the spare is disturbed through service of other components.

TIRE PRESSURES

Continuous Speeds up to 100 mph (160 km/h) without Trailer Tow

Engine Tire Size

Normal load

Front Rear Front bar / PSI / kPa

Full load

Rear

All

235/55R17

235/50R18

245/45R19

2.4 / 35 / 240

2.4 / 35 / 240 2.2 / 32 / 220

2.7 / 39 / 270

2.8 / 41 / 280

3.1 / 45 / 310

3.2 / 46 / 320

T155/70R17 4.2 / 60 / 420

Only fit snow chains to specified tires. See Using Snow Chains (page 266).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

276

Wheels and Tires

Continuous Speeds in excess of 100 mph (160 km/h) or under Trailer Tow conditions up to 62 mph (100 km/h)

Normal load Full load

Engine Tire Size

1.5L I4

GTDI

2.0L I4

DW10F or

2.0L I4

GTDI

235/55R17

235/50R18

245/45R19

235/55R17

235/50R18

245/45R19

Front Rear Front bar / PSI / kPa

2.6 / 38 / 260

Rear

2.8 / 41 / 280

3.0 / 44 / 300

2.8 / 41 / 280

3.0 / 44 / 300

3.2 / 46 / 320

3.4 / 49 / 340

3.0 / 44 / 300

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

277

Wheels and Tires

LUG NUTS

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNING

When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

Bolt size

M14 x 1.5

Ib-ft (Nm) *

162 lb.ft (220 Nm)

* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance, for example tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal.

A Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation.

Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

278

Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - S-MAX

Dimension description.

Maximum length.

Overall width including exterior mirrors.

Overall height - EC curb weight.

Wheelbase.

Front track.

Rear track.

in (mm)

190.9 in (4,848 mm)

84.1 in (2,137 mm)

67.6–69.5 in

(1,718–1,766 mm)

112.2 in (2,849 mm)

63.0 in (1,601 mm)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

279

Capacities and Specifications

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS - GALAXY

Dimension description.

Maximum length.

Maximum length. Vehicles with body styling kit.

Overall width including exterior mirrors.

Overall height - EC curb weight.

Wheelbase.

Front track.

Rear track.

in (mm)

188.8 in (4,796 mm)

190.2 in (4,830 mm)

84.1 in (2,137 mm)

64.3–66.0 in

(1,632–1,676 mm)

112.2 in (2,850 mm)

63.2 in (1,606 mm)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

280

Capacities and Specifications

TOWBAR DIMENSIONS - S-MAX

Item

Dimension Description

Bumper to center of tow ball.

Attachment point to center of tow ball.

Wheel center to center of tow ball.

Center of tow ball to side member.

Inner side of side member.

in (mm)

3.1 in (79 mm)

44.7 in (1,135 mm)

16.6 in (422 mm)

33.2 in (844 mm)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

281

Capacities and Specifications

Item

Dimension Description

Center of tow ball to center of first attachment point.

Center of tow ball to center of second attachment point.

Center of tow ball to center of third attachment point.

Maximum Static Vertical Load

(kg)

198 (90) in (mm)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

282

Capacities and Specifications

TOWBAR DIMENSIONS - GALAXY

Item

Dimension Description

Bumper to center of tow ball.

Attachment point to center of tow ball.

Wheel center to center of tow ball.

Center of tow ball to side member.

Inner side of side member.

in (mm)

3.1 in (80 mm)

42.8 in (1,088 mm)

16.7 in (423 mm)

33.3 in (846 mm)

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

283

Capacities and Specifications

Item

Dimension Description

Center of tow ball to center of first attachment point.

Center of tow ball to center of second attachment point.

Center of tow ball to center of third attachment point.

Maximum Static Vertical Load

(kg)

198 (90) in (mm)

Note: The information shown on the vehicle identification plate is dependent upon market requirements.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

PLATE

Note: Your vehicle identification plate design may vary to that shown.

Model

Variant

Engine designation

Engine power and emission level

Vehicle identification number

284

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Gross vehicle weight

Gross train weight

Maximum front axle weight

Maximum rear axle weight

Your vehicle identification number and maximum weights are shown on a plate, located at the bottom of the lock side of the right-hand door aperture.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

The vehicle identification number is stamped into the floor panel on the right-hand side, beside the front seat. It is also shown on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.

CAPACITIES AND

SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L

ECOBOOST™

WARNING

The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.

Capacities

Item

Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter.

Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter.

Engine coolant fill capacity.

1, 2, 3.

Automatic transmission fluid fill capacity.

Manual transmission fluid fill capacity.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

285

Capacity gal (L)

0.90 (4.1)

0.9 (4)

2.4 (10.7)

1.9 (8.5)

0.4 (1.75)

Capacities and Specifications

Fuel tank fill capacity.

Item

Windshield, rear window and headlamp washer system fill capacity.

Capacity gal (L)

1 Vehicles with Fuel Operated Heater add 0.2 gal (0.7 L).

2 Vehicles with Auxiliary Heater add 0.3 gal (1.3 L).

3 Vehicles with Fuel Operated Heater and Auxiliary Heater add 0.5 gal (2 L).

15.0 (68.1)

1.0 (4.5)

Adding Engine Oil

Quantity

0.2 gal (0.8 L)

The quantity of engine oil required to raise the indicated level on the dipstick from minimum to maximum.

Specifications

Materials

Name

Engine Oil - 5W-20

Antifreeze Super Plus Premium

4U7J-19544-xxxx

Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance

BU7J-M6C65-xxxx

Transmission Oil - 75W FE

7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA

Automatic Transmission Oil C-ML5

7U7J-M2C938-AB

Screen Wash

2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,

3U7J-19523-GA

Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.

If you are unable to find an engine oil that meets the specification defined by

WSS-M2C948-B, it is acceptable to use a

SAE 5W-20 engine oil that is defined by

ACEA A5/B5.

Specification

WSS-M2C948-B

WSS-M97B44-D

WSS-M6C65-A2

WSS-M2C200-D2

MERCON® LV

WSS-M2C938-A

WSS-M14P19-A

Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) between scheduled service intervals.

Using oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade may lead to:

• Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

• Longer engine cranking periods.

286

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications

• Increased emission levels.

• Reduced engine performance.

• Reduced fuel economy.

• Degraded brake performance.

We recommend Castrol and Ford engine oils and lubricants.

CAPACITIES AND

SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L

ECOBOOST™

WARNING

Capacities

Item

Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter.

Capacity gal (L)

1.2 (5.4)

Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter.

1.1 (5.1)

2.0 (8.9)

Engine coolant fill capacity.

1, 2, 3.

Automatic transmission fluid fill capacity.

Manual transmission fluid fill capacity.

1.9 (8.5)

0.4 (1.8)

Fuel tank fill capacity.

Windshield, rear window and headlamp washer system fill capacity.

15.0 (68.1)

1.0 (4.5)

Vehicles with Fuel Operated Heater add 0.2 gal (0.7 L).

Vehicles with Auxiliary Heater add 0.3 gal (1.3 L).

Vehicles with Fuel Operated Heater and Auxiliary Heater add 0.5 gal (2 L).

Adding Engine Oil

Quantity

0.19 gal (0.85 L)

The quantity of engine oil required to raise the indicated level on the dipstick from minimum to maximum.

287

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Specifications

Materials

Name

Engine Oil - 5W-20

Antifreeze Super Plus Premium

4U7J-19544-xxxx

Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance

BU7J-M6C65-xxxx

Transmission Oil - 75W FE

7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA

Automatic Transmission Oil C-ML5

7U7J-M2C938-AB

Screen Wash

2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,

3U7J-19523-GA

Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.

If you are unable to find an engine oil that meets the specification defined by

WSS-M2C948-B, it is acceptable to use a

SAE 5W-20 engine oil that is defined by

ACEA A5/B5.

Note: Do not use more than 0.19 gal

(0.85 L) between scheduled service intervals.

Using oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade may lead to:

• Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

• Longer engine cranking periods.

• Increased emission levels.

• Reduced engine performance.

• Reduced fuel economy.

• Degraded brake performance.

Specification

WSS-M2C948-B

WSS-M97B44-D

WSS-M6C65-A2

WSS-M2C200-D2

MERCON® LV

WSS-M2C938-A

WSS-M14P19-A

We recommend Castrol and Ford engine oils and lubricants.

CAPACITIES AND

SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L

DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

WARNING

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

288

Capacities and Specifications

Capacities

Item

Engine oil fill capacity including the oil filter.

Engine oil fill capacity excluding the oil filter.

Capacity gal (L)

1.2 (5.6)

1.2 (5.4)

1.6 (7.3)

Engine coolant fill capacity.

1, 2, 3.

120ps and 150ps - vehicles with manual transmission.

Engine coolant fill capacity.

1, 2, 3.

180ps - vehicles with manual transmission.

1.7 (7.8)

Engine coolant fill capacity.

1, 2, 3.

Vehicles with automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission fluid fill capacity.

Manual transmission fluid fill capacity.

Fuel tank fill capacity.

Fuel tank fill capacity - vehicles with All Wheel Drive.

1.8 (8.2)

1.9 (8.5)

0.4 (1.8)

14.6 (66.2)

14.1 (64.3)

Windshield, rear window and headlamp washer system fill capacity.

1.0 (4.5)

Vehicles with Fuel Operated Heater add 0.2 gal (0.7 L).

Vehicles with Auxiliary Heater add 0.3 gal (1.3 L).

Vehicles with Fuel Operated Heater and Auxiliary Heater add 0.5 gal (2 L).

Adding Engine Oil

Quantity

0.4 gal (1.6 L)

The quantity of engine oil required to raise the indicated level on the dipstick from minimum to maximum.

Specifications

Materials

Name

Engine Oil - 0W-30

Antifreeze Super Plus Premium

Specification

WSS-M2C950-A

WSS-M97B44-D

289

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Name

4U7J-19544-xxxx

Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance

BU7J-M6C65-xxxx

Transmission Oil - 75W FE

7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA

Automatic Transmission Oil C-ML5

7U7J-M2C938-AB

Screen Wash

2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,

3U7J-19523-GA

Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.

If you are unable to find an engine oil that meets the specification defined by

WSS-M2C950-A, it is acceptable to use a

SAE 0W-30 engine oil that is defined by

ACEA A5/B5.

Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) between scheduled service intervals.

Using oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade may lead to:

• Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

• Longer engine cranking periods.

• Increased emission levels.

• Reduced engine performance.

• Reduced fuel economy.

• Degraded brake performance.

Specification

WSS-M6C65-A2

WSS-M2C200-D2

MERCON® LV

WSS-M2C938-A

WSS-M14P19-A

We recommend Castrol and Ford engine oils and lubricants.

FUEL CONSUMPTION FIGURES

Please refer to the regional Ford website.

290

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors

Distance and Strength

Terrain

Station overload

Radio reception factors

The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interference in the audio system.

CD and CD Player Information

Note: CD units play commercially pressed

4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.

Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact an authorized dealer for further information.

Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached.

Always handle discs by their edges only.

Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion.

Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods.

MP3 and WMA Track and Folder

Structure

Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows:

• There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and

WMA track mode (system default) and

MP3 and WMA folder mode.

• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from

T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and

WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present.

291

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc

(noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing

MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)

T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create.

While various files may be present, (files with extensions other than MP3 and

WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.

In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the

MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

AM/FM/CD/SYNC

WARNING

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here.

Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite radio, may not be available in your location.

Check with an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

292

Audio System

CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Use the function buttons to select Repeat or Shuffle.

SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.

When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently.

Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.

Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons to enter a phone number.

Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

TUNE: Turn to search the frequency in individual increments.

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.

Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current track.

End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

293

Audio System

Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.

CD slot: Insert a CD.

Pick-up or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming phone call or to make a phone call.

Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through the current track.

Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD, pause the SYNC menu or mute the radio.

VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to adjust the volume.

PHONE:

Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system.

See SYNC™ (page 304).

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu

Structure later in this chapter.

MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.

Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.

RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.

Use the function buttons to select options such as Autostore and Direct

Frequency Input.

TA: TA allows you to turn Traffic announcements on or off. You can also press this button to cancel announcements during an active announcement.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

294

Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

SYNC 2/PREMIUM AM/FM/CD

WARNING

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here.

VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to adjust the volume.

CD slot: Insert a CD.

295

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

TUNE: Turn to search the frequency in individual increments.

Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward through the current track.

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.

Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency and press this button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to the previous strong radio station. In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move quickly backward through the current track.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:

SYNC 2/SONY AM/FM/CD

Note: The touchscreen system controls

most of the audio features. See SYNC™ 2

(page 344).

WARNING

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

296

Audio System

Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on.

CD slot: Insert a CD.

Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.

- TUNE + : Press these buttons to search the frequency in individual increments.

VOL: Turn the control to adjust the volume.

Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction to the next strong radio station. In CD mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or next track. Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction within the current track.

Menu Structure

Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different.

Press the menu button.

Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options.

Press the right arrow to enter a menu.

Press the left arrow to exit a menu.

Press the ok button to confirm a selection.

297

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

Scan

Radio

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-AST and FM-AST frequency bands.

Radio Text

Select to display extra information such as artist name.

Extra information may not always be available.

Alternative Frequency

Regional Mode

News announcement

Service Linking

Speed Compensated Volume

Sound

Audio Settings

With the alternative frequency option active, the system re-tunes to a different frequency with better reception for the same station.

Regional mode controls the behavior of alternative frequencies, switching between regionally related networks.

With the news announcement option active, the system interrupts the active audio source to provide incoming news announcements, if the currently tuned station (or last tuned station in case of other active media) supports news.

With Service Linking active the system automatically switches from DAB to FM, in case DAB becomes unavailable.

Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.

Select to adjust settings for Treble,

Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

298

Audio System

Occupancy Mode

DSP

Only within DAB variants.

Audio Settings

Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position.

Choose between the stereo modes. Only with the external sound systems.

Scan All

Scan Folder

Set Date and Time

24 Hour

CD Settings

Select to scan all disc selections.

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.

Clock Settings

Select to set the time and calendar date.

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.

Dimming

Language

Temp. Setting

DIGITAL RADIO

General Information

The system allows you to listen to DAB

(Digital Audio Broadcast) radio stations.

Note: Coverage differs from region to region and influences the quality of reception. It is broadcast nationwide, regionally and locally.

Display Settings

Select to change display brightness.

Select to display the language in English, French or

Spanish.

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius.

The following formats are supported:

• DAB.

• DAB+.

• DMB-Audio (Digital Multimedia

Broadcasting).

Ensembles

Ensembles contain a group of radio stations. Each ensemble can consist of several different radio stations.

299

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

The radio station name displays below the ensemble name.

Note: When you tune from one ensemble to another, it can take a while until the system synchronizes to the next ensemble.

The system mutes during synchronization.

Service Linking

If you leave the coverage area of a DAB radio station, the system automatically switches to the corresponding FM radio station.

You can switch this feature on and off

using the information display. See General

Information (page 291).

Note: If a DAB radio station has no corresponding FM radio station, the audio mutes when attempting to switch.

Note: The system displays the FM symbol when DAB and FM radio stations link.

Note: The sound quality changes when your system switches from DAB to the corresponding FM station.

Using Digital Audio Broadcast on a Non-Touchscreen

Selecting Radio Band

DAB1 and DAB2 operate in the same way.

You can store up to 10 different presets on each band.

Press the RADIO button.

2. Press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands.

3. Select DAB1 or DAB2 .

4. You can also press the RADIO button multiple times to toggle through all wavebands.

Radio Station Tuning Control

Press the RADIO button and select DAB1 or DAB2 . All preset banks operate in the same way and can store up to 10 different preset radio stations.

Note: When you reach the first or last radio station within an ensemble, further tuning skips to the next ensemble. There may be a delay during this change and the audio briefly mutes.

Seek Tuning

Press a seek button. The system stops at the first radio station it finds in the direction chosen.

Radio Station List

This feature displays all the available radio stations in a list.

Press function button 1.

2. Press the left or right arrow buttons to change ensembles. Press the up or down arrow button to navigate to your required radio station.

3. Press OK to confirm your selection.

Note: The display only shows radio stations in the current ensemble.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE dial to the left or right.

Radio Station Preset Buttons

This feature allows you to store up to 10 favorite radio stations from any ensemble in each preset bank.

Select a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A progress bar and message appear. When the progress bar completes, the radio station has been stored. The system mutes momentarily as confirmation.

300

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

Once stored, press a preset button at any time to select a favorite radio station.

Note: Radio stations stored on the preset buttons may not always be available if you have left the coverage area. The system will mute when this happens.

Radio Text

You can display extra information. For example; artist name. To switch this option on, select a radio station and press function button 3.

Note: Extra information may not always be available.

Using Digital Audio Broadcast and

SYNC with Touchscreen

Selecting Radio Band

DAB1, DAB2 and DAB3 operate in the same way. You can store up to 6 different presets on each band.

Press the RADIO button.

2. Press the left arrow button to display the available wavebands.

3. Select DAB1 , DAB2 or DAB3 .

Radio Station Tuning Control

Press the RADIO button and select DAB1 ,

DAB2 or DAB3 . All preset banks operate in the same way and can store up to 10 different preset radio stations.

Note: When you reach the first or last radio station within an ensemble, further tuning skips to the next ensemble. There may be a delay during this change and the audio briefly mutes.

Seek Tuning

Press a seek button. The system stops at the first radio station it finds in the direction chosen.

Radio Station List

This feature displays all the available radio stations in a list.

Press the browse button.

2. Press the previous ensemble or next ensemble to change ensembles.

Navigate through the list and select the station by pressing the touchscreen area displaying your selection.

3. Press OK to confirm your selection.

Note: The display only shows radio stations in the current ensemble.

Manual Tuning

Press the + tune - button.

Radio Station Preset Buttons

This feature allows you to store up to 6 favorite radio stations from any ensemble in each preset bank.

Select a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. A message appears when the radio station has been stored. The system mutes momentarily as confirmation.

Once stored, press a preset button at any time to select a favorite radio station.

Note: Radio stations stored on the preset buttons may not always be available if you have left the coverage area. The system will mute when this happens.

Radio Text

You can display extra information. For example; artist name. To switch this option on select Options > Radio Text On .

Note: Extra information may not always be available.

301

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

Audio System

AUDIO INPUT JACK

WARNINGS

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is moving.

Store the portable music player in a secure location, such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving.

The auxiliary input jack allows you to connect and play music from your portable music player through your vehicle speakers.

You can use any portable music player designed for use with headphones. Your audio extension cable must have male

1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at each end.

Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the parking brake and put the transmission in position P .

2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the auxiliary input jack.

3. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.

4. Adjust the volume as desired.

5. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its maximum level.

6. Press the media button until the audio input option appears in the display. You should hear music from your device even if it is low.

Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

302

USB PORT

Audio System

MEDIA HUB

(If Equipped)

The media hub is inside the storage compartment in front of the gear shift lever.

The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge

devices (if supported). See SYNC™ (page

304).

Line in.

USB ports.

SD card slot.

See Entertainment (page 365).

AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING

Message

Please check CD

Drive malfunction

CD drive too hot

Description and Action

General error message for CD fault conditions. For example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc.

Make sure the disc is loaded correctly. Clean and re-try, or replace disc with known music disc. If the error persists contact an authorized dealer.

General error message for a mechanism fault. The system has detected a fault that requires service.

General error message for the mechanism being too hot. The unit will not work until it has cooled down. If the error persists contact an authorized dealer.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

303

GENERAL INFORMATION

SYNC™

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your

Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and portable media player.

This allows you to:

• Make and receive calls

• Access and play music from your media player

• Use Emergency Assistance and applications, via SYNC Applink

• Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands

• Stream music from your connected cell phone

• Select pre-defined text messages (if your device supports this)

• Use the advanced voice recognition system

• Charge your USB device (if your device supports this)

These features are not available in all markets and may require activation.

Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market.

Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC.

Support

For further support, see an authorized dealer. For more information, visit the regional Ford website.

304

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Safety Information

WARNING

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

When using SYNC:

• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and cables where you cannot step on them or they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. Refer to your device's manual for further information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer.

Privacy Information

When a cell phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile that is linked to that cell phone. The system creates the profile to offer you more mobile features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your phonebook, text messages

(read and unread) and call history. This will include the history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. If you connect a media player, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.

The cell phone profile, media player index and development log will remain in the system unless deleted. They are generally accessible in your vehicle only when you connect your cell phone or media player.

If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you complete a master reset to erase all stored

information. See SYNC™ (page 304).

Special equipment is required to access system data. Access to your vehicle's

SYNC module is also required. We will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described without consent.

Examples where system data can be accessed are for a court order, where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of us. Further privacy

information is available. See SYNC™

Applications and Services (page 319).

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the steering wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

Helpful Hints

Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands.

305

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish followed by a single beep. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system.

Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.

You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can also cancel a voice session at any time by pressing and holding the voice button.

Initiating a Voice Session

Press the voice button located on the steering wheel. A list of available commands appears in the display.

(cancel | stop | exit) help main menu

Global voice commands

This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by holding the voice button for two or more seconds.

This command provides you with hints, examples and instructions.

This command restarts the voice session from the initial starting point.

System Interaction and Feedback

The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and your chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.

The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.

Adjusting the Interaction Level

Press the voice button. When prompted:

Command voice settings

Description

Provides access to change the interaction level.

Then any of the following:

Command interaction mode advanced interaction mode novice

Description

Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts.

Provides more detailed interaction and guidance.

306

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request. For

Command voice settings example, the system may ask if the command phone is correct.

Press the voice button. When prompted:

Description

Provides access to change the confirmation prompt setting.

Then any of the following:

Command Description confirmation prompts off Makes a best guess from the command. You may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.

confirmation prompts on Clarifies your voice command with a short question.

The system creates suggestion lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice commands.

When switched on, the system may prompt you with as many as four possibilities for clarification.

Command Description media candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the media suggestion list. The system may occasionally ask you questions.

media candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for media suggestions.

phone candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the cell phone suggestion list. The system may occasionally ask you questions.

phone candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for cell phone suggestions.

Press the MENU button.

Changing the Voice Settings

You can change the voice settings using the information and entertainment display.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

307

SYNC™

You can then select the following:

Action

SYNC-Settings

Voice settings

Message

Enters menu for voice options.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR

PHONE

Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone's functionality.

At a minimum, most cell phones with

Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions:

• Answering an incoming call.

• Ending a call.

• Using privacy mode.

• Dialing a number.

• Redialing.

• Call waiting notification.

• Caller ID.

Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are cell phone dependent features. To check your cell phone's compatibility, refer to your device's manual or visit the regional Ford website.

Pairing a Cell Phone For the First

Time

Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the system allows you to make and receive hands-free calls.

Note: You must switch the ignition and radio on.

Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up or down arrows on your audio system.

Make sure the Bluetooth feature on your cell phone is switched on before starting the search. Refer to your device's manual if necessary.

2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates that no phones are paired, select the option to add.

3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for

SYNC on your cell phone to start the pairing process.

4. Select SYNC on your cell phone.

5. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio display and accept the request on the phone and the vehicle display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.

Note: In some cases the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display.

The display indicates when the pairing is successful.

Depending on your cell phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current cell phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone the system automatically tries to connect with first when you switch the ignition on) or downloading your phonebook.

308

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

The information display may show your cell phone's battery charge level and signal strength.

Using Voice Commands

Make sure to switch on your phone's

Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary.

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice Command Action and Description

(pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone |

Bluetooth [audio])

| add phone)

Follow the instructions on the audio display.

Words in square brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command.

Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone

SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook.

Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones

Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the system allows you to make and receive hands-free calls.

Note: You must switch the ignition and radio on.

Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up or down arrows on your audio system.

Make sure the Bluetooth feature on your cell phone is switched on before starting the search. Refer to your device's manual if necessary.

2. Press the PHONE button.

3. Select the option for Bluetooth devices.

4. Press the OK button.

5. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process.

6. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for

SYNC on your device to start the pairing process.

Select SYNC on your cell phone.

8. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio display and accept the request on the phone and the vehicle display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.

Note: In some cases the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display.

The display indicates when the pairing is successful.

The system may prompt you with questions such as setting the current cell phone as the primary cell phone or downloading your phonebook.

Cell Phone Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice Command

(phone | Blackberry | iPhone | Mobile)

Then say any of the following: call (___) call ___ at home

309

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Voice Command call ___ ([at] work | [(in | at) [the]] office) call ___ on (mobile | cell) call ___ on other dial [[a] number]

([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to phone | handsfree off)

(hold call [on] | (put | place) call on hold) join (call | calls) mute [call] [on]

(mute [call] off | Unmute [call])

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)

Voice Command

(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])

[text] (messages | message)

Help

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beetles".

See Dial table below.

These commands are only valid while in a phone call.

See the text message table below.

Dial Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following commands:

Voice Command

Pound

Number

Asterisk or Star clear

Action and Description

This will add a # symbol to the number or name.

0 (zero) to 9 (nine)

This will add a * symbol to the number or name.

Deletes all entered digits

(delete | correct) Deletes the last set of entered digits.

Plus This will add a + symbol to the number or name.

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or any button on the audio unit.

Phonebook Hints

To hear how the SYNC system speaks a name browse phonebook, select a contact and press:

Menu Item

Hear it

Making a Call

Press the voice button and when prompted say either:

310

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Voice

Command call

(someone

| [[a] name]) dial [[a] number]

Action and Description

SYNC prompts you to say the numbers that you wish to dial. After you say the numbers, the system confirms it.

When the system has stated the number, you say any of the following:

Voice

Command

(dial | send)

(delete | correct) clear

Action and Description

This initiates the call.

To erase the last spoken digit.

To erase all spoken digits.

Mic. off

Menu Item

Privacy

Hold

Dial a number

To end the call, press the end call button on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display and press OK .

Receiving a Call

When receiving a call, you can:

• Answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or by selecting the accept call option in the audio display and pressing the OK button.

• Reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or by selecting the reject call option in the audio display and pressing the OK button.

• Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Cell Phone Options During an

Active Call

During an active call, you have extra menu features which become available, for example putting a call on hold.

To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select the option for more.

Action and Description

Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone on, select the option again.

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cell phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display will indicate the call is private.

Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display will indicate the call is on hold.

Enter numbers using the audio system numeric keypad, for example numbers for passwords.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

311

SYNC™

Menu Item

Join calls

Phonebook

Call history

Action and Description

Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multi-party or conference call.

Select the option for more.

2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the option for more.

3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.

Access your phonebook contacts.

Select the option for more.

2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button.

3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.

4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display.

5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Access your call history log.

Select the option for more.

2. Scroll to the option until call history appears. Press the

OK button.

3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed).

4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display.

5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Accessing Features Through the

Cell Phone Menu

You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages as well as access cell phone and system settings.

You can also access advanced features such as emergency assistance.

The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook and call history each time your cell phone connects to the system. You must turn on the auto download feature if your cell phone supports it.

Note: This is a cell phone dependent feature.

Press the PHONE button to enter the cell phone menu.

2. Select one of the options available.

312

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Menu Item

Dial a number

Redial

Phonebook

Call history

Speed Dial

Text messaging

BT Devices

Phone settings

Action and Description

Dial a number using the audio system numeric keypad.

Redial the last number called (if available). Press the OK button to select.

Access your downloaded phonebook.

Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to quickly access an alphabetical category. You can also use the letters on the keypad to jump in the list.

2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.

3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display.

4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.

Press the OK button to select.

2. Scroll to select either incoming calls, outgoing calls or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection.

3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Select one of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system numeric keypad.

Send, download and delete text messages.

Access the following option for Bluetooth device menu listings:

Add

Delete

Conn.

Discon.

Master

View various settings and features on your cell phone.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

313

SYNC™

Text Messaging

The system allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road.

Note: This is a cell phone dependent feature.

Receiving a Text Message

Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.

Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.

When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message.

To hear the message you can say:

Voice command Action and Description

(listen to | read)

([text] message)

Select this option to have the system read the message to you.

Using the screen you also have the following options:

Item

Ignore

Action and Description

View

Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message inbox.

Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For additional options select:

More...

If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the following options:

Reply to sender

Call sender

Forward msg.

Press the OK button to access, and then scroll through a list of pre-defined messages to send.

Press the OK button to call the sender of the message.

Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting

Your Text Messages

Press the PHONE button.

2. Select the text messaging option, then press the OK button.

Choose from the following:

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

314

SYNC™

New

View

Delete

More...

Menu Item Action and Description

When you select the option to send a text message, a list of pre-defined messages appear in the audio display. Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages.

Allows you to read the full message and in addition provides the option to have the message read out to you by the system.

To go to the next message select the more option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message.

Allows you to delete current text messages from the system

(not your cell phone). The audio display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted.

Allows you to delete all messages or to manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cell phone.

Sending a Text Message

Select the send option when the desired selection is highlighted in the audio display.

2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears and press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each text message is sent with a pre-defined signature.

Note: You can send text messages two ways. You can chose a contact from your phonebook, call history or by entering a phone number and selecting the text option from the audio display. You can also reply to a received message in the inbox.

Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.

Accessing Your Cell Phone

Settings

These are cell phone dependent features.

Your cell phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ringtone, text message notification, modify your phonebook and set up automatic download.

Press the PHONE button.

2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, then press the OK button.

3. Scroll to select from the following options:

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

315

SYNC™

Menu Item

Set as master

Phone status

Set ringtone

Text msg notify

Phonebook pref.

Action and Description

If this option is checked, the system will use this cell phone as the master when there is more than one cell phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all paired cell phones (not only for the active one) using the Bluetooth devices menu.

See the cell phone name, provider name, cell phone number, signal level and battery level. When done, press the left arrow button to return to the cell phone status menu.

Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's or your cell phone's). If your cell phone supports in-band ringing, your cell phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cell phone ringtone option.

Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone.

2. Press the OK button to select.

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn the audible tone on or off.

Modify the contents of your phonebook, e.g. add, delete, download. Press the OK button to select and scroll between the options in the table below.

To modify the phone book preferences, choose from the following:

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

316

SYNC™

Menu Item

Add contacts

Delete

Download now

Auto-download

Action and Description

Push the desired contacts on your cell phone. Refer to your device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook.

When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings.

Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system.

When automatic download is switched on, any changes, additions or deletions saved in the system since your last download are deleted.

When automatic download is switched off, your phonebook will not be downloaded when your cell phone connects to the system.

Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be accessed when your paired cell phone is connected to the system.

Check or uncheck this option to automatically download your phonebook each time your cell phone connects to the system.

Downloading times are cell phone dependent and quantity dependent.

Bluetooth Devices

This menu provides access to your

Bluetooth devices. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the menu options. It allows you to add, connect and delete devices and set a cell phone as primary.

Add

Menu Item

Bluetooth Devices Menu Options

Press the PHONE button.

2. Scroll until the Bluetooth device option appears, then press the OK button.

3. Scroll to select from the following options:

Action and Description

Pair additional cell phones to the system.

Select the option to add to start the pairing process.

2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your cell phone. Refer to your device's manual if necessary.

3. Select SYNC on your cell phone.

317

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Menu Item Action and Description

4. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio display and accept the request on the phones and the vehicles display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.

5. When the option to set the cell phone as the primary cell phone appears, select either yes or no.

6. Depending on the functionality of your cell phone, the system may ask you extra questions (for example, if you would like to download your phonebook). Select either yes or no to confirm your response.

Delete After deleting a cell phone from the list, the cell phone can only be connected again by repeating the full pairing process.

Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device.

Master

Conn.

Discon.

The system attempts to connect with the primary cell phone every time you switch the ignition on. When a cell phone is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk.

Set a previously paired cell phone as your primary cell phone.

Select the master option to confirm the primary cell phone.

Connect a previously paired cell phone. You can only have one cell phone connected at a time to use the cell phone functionality. When another cell phone is connected, the previous cell phone will be disconnected from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cell phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time.

Disconnects the selected cell phone. Select this option and confirm when asked to. After disconnecting a cell phone, it can be connected again without repeating the full pairing process.

In some cases the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.

System Settings

Press the MENU button.

2. Select the SYNC settings option, then press the OK button.

3. Scroll to select from the following options:

318

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Menu Item

Bluetooth on

Set defaults

Master reset

Install on SYNC

System info

Voice settings

Browse USB

Action and Description

Check or uncheck this option to turn the Bluetooth interface of the system on or off. Select this option then press the OK button to change the option's status.

This selection does not erase your indexed information

(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices).

Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. Return to the factory default settings.

Completely erase all information stored on the system

(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to the factory default settings.

Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. The display indicates when complete and the system takes you back to the previous menu.

Install applications or software updates you have downloaded.

Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB thumb drive in order to finish an installation successfully.

Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number.

Press the OK button to select.

The voice settings submenu contains various options. See

Using Voice Recognition (page 305).

Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up or down arrows to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrows to enter and leave a folder. Media content can be directly selected for playback from this menu.

Press the MENU button to enter the system menu.

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND

SERVICES

A list of available applications appears.

Each application may have its own specific settings.

319

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Message

SYNC-Apps

SYNC Emergency Assistance

WARNINGS

For this feature to work, your cell phone must have Bluetooth and be compatible with the system.

Always place your cell phone in a secure location inside your vehicle.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the cell phone which could prevent this feature from working correctly.

Unless the feature setting is switched on prior to a crash, the system will not attempt to place an emergency call which could delay the response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death. Do not wait for the system to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid a delayed response time. If you do not hear Emergency

Assistance within five seconds of the crash, the system or cell phone may be damaged or non-functional.

Description and Action

Scroll to this option, and then press OK .

If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the fuel pump shut off, the system may contact emergency services through a paired and connected cell phone. For more information about the system and

Emergency Assistance, visit the regional

Ford website.

Note: Before selecting this feature, you must read the Emergency Assistance privacy notice later in this section for important information.

Note: When you switch this feature on or off, that setting applies for all paired cell phones. If you have turned this feature off and a previously paired phone connects when you switch on the ignition, either a voice message plays, a display message or icon is shown, or both.

Note: Every cell phone operates differently.

While this feature works with most cell phones, some cell phones may experience difficulties using this feature.

Note: Make sure you are familiar with the

information about airbag deployment. See

Supplementary Restraints System (page

29).

Switching Emergency Assistance

On and Off

Press the MENU button then select:

Message

SYNC-Apps

Emerg. assist

Action

Press OK .

Press OK . Select the option you require and press OK .

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

320

SYNC™

Display Options

If you switch on this feature, a confirmation message appears in the display.

If you switch off this feature, a dialog will appear in the display, which allows you to set a voice reminder.

Off with voice reminder provides a display and voice reminder when your cell phone connects and your vehicle starts.

Off without voice reminder provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder when your cell phone connects.

To make sure that Emergency Assistance works correctly:

• The system must have power and be working correctly at the time of the crash and during feature activation and use.

• You must switch on the feature before a crash.

• You must have a cell phone connected to the system.

• In certain countries, it may be necessary to have a valid and registered SIM card with credit in order to place and maintain an emergency call.

• A connected cell phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the crash.

• A connected cell phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength.

• Your vehicle must have battery power.

Note: This feature only works in countries or regions where SYNC Emergency

Assistance can call the local emergency services. Visit the regional Ford website for details.

In the Event of a Crash

Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may turn on Emergency Assistance). However, if Emergency Assistance is triggered the system tries to contact the emergency services. If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses connection to the system, it searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired cell phone. The system attempts to make an emergency call.

Before making a call:

• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call, an introductory message plays for the emergency operator. After this message, there is hands-free communication between your vehicle's occupants and the operator.

• The system provides a short window of time (approximately 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you do not cancel the call, the system attempts to make an emergency call.

• The system plays a message letting you know when it attempts to make an emergency call. You can cancel the call by selecting the relevant function button or by pressing the end call button on the steering wheel.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

321

SYNC™

During a call:

• Emergency Assistance uses your vehicle GPS or cellular network information when available to determine the most appropriate language to use. It alerts the emergency operator of the crash and delivers the introductory message. This may include your vehicle GPS coordinates.

• The language the system uses to interact with the occupants of your vehicle may differ from the language used to deliver information to the emergency operator.

• After the delivery of the introductory message the voice line opens so that you can speak hands-free with the emergency operator.

• When the line is connected, you must be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location information immediately.

Note: While the system provides information to the emergency operator, the system plays a message letting you know it is sending important information. It then lets you know when the line is open to start hands-free communication.

Note: During an Emergency Assistance call, an emergency priority screen appears which contains vehicle GPS coordinates when available.

Note: It is possible that GPS location information is not available at the time of the crash; in this case, Emergency

Assistance will still attempt to place an emergency call.

Note: It is possible that the emergency services will not receive the GPS coordinates; in this case, hands-free communication with an emergency operator is available.

Note: The emergency operator may also receive information from the cellular network such as cell phone number, cell phone location and cell phone carrier name independent from SYNC Emergency

Assistance.

Emergency Assistance may not work if:

• Your cell phone or Emergency

Assistance hardware sustains damage in the crash.

• The vehicle battery or the system has no power.

• A crash ejects your cell phone from your vehicle.

• You do not have a valid and registered

SIM card with credit in your cell phone.

• You are in a country or region where the SYNC Emergency Assistance cannot place the call. Visit the regional

Ford website for details.

Important Information about the

Emergency Assistance Feature

Emergency Assistance does not currently call emergency services in the following markets: Albania, Belarus, Bosnia and

Herzegovina, Macedonia, Netherlands,

Ukraine, Moldova and Russia.

Visit the regional Ford website for the latest details.

Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice

When you switch on Emergency

Assistance, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off. This feature has the capability to disclose your location information to the emergency operator or other details about your vehicle or crash to provide the most appropriate emergency services.

If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch on the feature.

322

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

SYNC AppLink

The system enables voice and manual control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and manual controls.

Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.

Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port.

Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.

Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford website.

Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded.

Some apps will work automatically with no setup. Other apps will want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites.

We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle.

To Access Using the SYNC Menu

Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select an app. Once an app is running through SYNC, press the right arrow button to access the app menu. You can access various app features from here, for example thumbs up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow button to exit the app menu.

Press the MENU button then select:

Message

SYNC-Apps

Description and Action

Mobile Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK .

Find new Apps Select this option if the app required is not listed.

Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device.

To Access Using Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Command mobile (apps | applications)

Description and Action

Say the name of the application after the tone. The application will start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app.

The following voice commands are always available:

323

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Command

[main menu] help mobile (apps | applications) list [mobile] (apps | applications) find [new] [mobile]

(apps | applications)

(quit | exit | close)

Description and Action

Use this command to hear a list of available voice commands.

The system will prompt you to say the name of the app to start it.

The system will list all of the currently available mobile apps.

The system will search your connected mobile device for

SYNC compatible apps.

Use this command followed by the name of the app.

You can also say the name of any SYNC compitable app to start it on SYNC. To see a list of the available voice commands for an app, say the name of an app followed by help. For example you could say

"Spotify help".

Enabling and Disabling Push

Notifications

Some apps can send push notifications. A push notification is an alert from an app running in the background and is delivered by voice, pop up or both. This may be particularly useful for news or location based apps.

Press the MENU button then select:

Message

SYNC-Apps

Mobile Apps

SYNC-Settings

All Apps

Description and Action

If push notifications are supported, this setting will be listed.

Select to enable or disable the feature as required.

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps

To use the system you must consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates, using the data plan associated with the connected device.

Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your

VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically.

Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system.

324

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network.

Message

Update needed

Up-to-date

Updating...

App Status

You can view the current status of an app in the settings menu. There are three possible statuses:

Description and Action

The system has detected a new app requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required.

No update is required.

The system is trying to receive an update.

Options in the settings menu:

Message

Request Update

Disable Updates

App Permissions

Permissions are divided by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually.

You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu.

Description and Action

If an update is required and you want to manually request the update, for example when you are in a Wi-Fi hotspot.

Select this option to disable automatic updates.

When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example:

• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app including, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel consumption, engine speed, battery voltage, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, ambient temperature, date and time.

• To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information, including, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine speeds, braking events, brake pedal switch, acceleration, accelerator pedal position, clutch pedal switch, trip length, trip time, trip cost, percent engine on time, and percent of time at speed.

325

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

• To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed.

• To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state.

Note: You will only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC.

Note: We are not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve us to provide to an app.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR

MEDIA PLAYER

You can access and play music from your media player through your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, for example artist or albums.

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any media player including: iPod, Zune, Plays from device players, and most USB drives.

SYNC also supports audio formats, for example MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.

Confirm that the USB device has been formatted correctly and has the following specifications:

• USB 2.0.

• File format must be FAT16/32.

Note: NTFS file format is not supported.

The format of the audio files on the USB device must be:

• MP3.

• Non DRM protected WMA.

• WAV.

• AAC.

Connecting Your Media Player to the USB Port

Note: If your media player has a power switch, make sure you switch on the device.

To Connect Using Voice Commands

Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port.

2. Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice Command Action and Description

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3

[player])

You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. Refer to the media voice commands.

You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where

(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.

To Connect Using the System Menu

Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port.

2. Press the Media button (next to the audio display) until an initializing message appears in the display.

326

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Menu Item

Browse USB

Action and Description

Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu.

Choose from the following:

Menu Item

Play all

Playlists

Songs

Artists

Albums

Genres

Browse USB

Reset USB

Exit

What's Playing?

At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags of the current track, if populated.

Media Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice Command Action and Description

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3

[player])

You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is.

You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.

For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays this (what's or what is) playing.

327

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Voice Command pause play play [album] ___ play all

Description and Action

Pauses device playback.

Resumes device playback.

Play all media on the device from the first track to the last.

[play] (similar music | more like this)

Plays the next track on the current media.

Plays the previous track on current media.

Creates a play list of similar genre to the one currently playing.

play [song | track | title | file] ___ repeat off repeat one [on] shuffle [all] [on]

Repeats the current track.

Plays the current play list in a random order.

(Not all devices support this command.) shuffle off

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |

(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what

| which) (song | track | artist) is this |

(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this)

At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags

(if populated) of the current track.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles".

Examples of USB Commands

SYNC provides the user with many intuitive ways to find and play a song using voice.

For example, if we have a song called

"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical

Mystery Tour" we can say the following to play this song:

328

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

• Play song "Penny Lane".

• Play "Penny Lane".

If we wanted to play the entire album, we can say:

• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".

• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".

Bluetooth Audio

The system is also capable of playing music from your cellular phone through

Bluetooth.

To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the

MEDIA button (next to the audio display) or Source button, or press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice Command

Bluetooth audio

Then any of the following:

Options

Message

| chapter | episode]

Media Menu Features

The media menu allows you to select how to play your music, for example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat, and to find similar music or reset the index of your USB devices.

Press AUX to select USB playback.

Description and Action

This will enter the media menu.

Then any of the following:

Shuffle

Message

Repeat track

Similar music

Description and Action

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off.

You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.

Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

329

SYNC™

Message

Reset USB

Description and Action are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag.

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library.

2. Press AUX to select USB playback.

Accessing Your USB Song Library

Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port.

Message

Browse USB

Description and Action

This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist and track or even to browse what is on your USB device.

If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll through and select:

Play all

Message Description and Action

Play all indexed media files from your playing device one at a time in numerical order.

Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the display.

Playlists

Access your playlists from formats, ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.

Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press OK .

Songs

Search for and play a specific indexed track.

Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press OK .

330

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Artists

Message Description and Action

Sort all indexed media files by artist. Once selected, the system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.

Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press OK .

Albums

Sort all indexed media files by albums.

Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired albums, and then press OK .

Genres

Browse USB

Sort indexed music by genre type.

Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press OK .

Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC; other saved files are not visible.

Press OK to select.

2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on your flash drive, and then press OK .

Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library.

You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the numeric keypad to jump in the list.

Using Voice Commands

You can access and view your USB songs using voice commands.

Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

331

SYNC™

Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the following commands:

Voice Command

(browse | search | show) all (album | albums)

(browse | search | show) all (artist | artists)

(browse | search | show) all (genre | genres)

(browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists)

(browse | search | show) all (song | songs

(browse | search | show) album ___

(browse | search | show) artist ___

(browse | search | show) genre ___

(browse | search | show) playlist ___

Line In Audio

To access the Line in audio source say:

Voice Command

((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio video)

USB 2

(If Equipped)

Your vehicle may come equipped with an additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 is located inside the storage compartment of the vehicle's center console.

You can plug in an additional USB device into the second USB port.

Note: SYNC only supports one connected iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever one you plug in first). When you connect a second iOS device, the systems charges it, but does not support playback from it.

Voice Commands for Audio

Sources

Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command.

Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice Command

(music | audio | entertainment) [system]

Below are a few examples of voice commands you can use.

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) (autostore | AST | autoset)

[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) 2

Bluetooth (audio | stereo)

(disc | CD [player]) play

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___

[tune [to]] FM 2

((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio video)

Radio

332

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Voice Command

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |

(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what

| which) (song | track | artist) is this |

(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this)

Help

Radio Voice Commands

If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button, and then say any of the commands in the following table.

If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say:

Voice Command

Radio

You can then say any of the following commands.

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) (autostore | AST | autoset)

[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) 2

[tune [to]] ((AM | medium wave) ___ |

___ [AM | medium wave])

[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) preset

___

[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) 1 preset

___

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1

Voice Command

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset)

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___

[tune [to]] FM preset ___

[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___

[tune [to]] preset ___ tune [radio]

Help

CD Voice Commands

If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button, and then say any of the commands in the following table.

If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say:

Voice Command

(disc | CD [player]) play

You can then say any of the following commands.

pause play

[play] next track

[play] previous track

[play | change to] track [number] ___ repeat (track | song) [on]

333

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Voice Command repeat folder [on] repeat off

(shuffle | random | mix) [on |

(tracks | songs) [on]]

(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | disc) [on]

(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] shuffle off

You need to indicate to the system which track or folder to repeat or shuffle when using these commands.

Bluetooth Devices and System

Settings

You can access these menus using the

audio display. See Using SYNC™ With

Your Phone (page 308).

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING

Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below.

To check your cell phone's compatibility, visit the regional Ford website.

Cell phone issues

Issue Possible cause

A lot of background noise during a phone call.

The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting

SYNC performance.

During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me.

Possible cell phone malfunction.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Possible solution

Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.

Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again.

Make sure that the microphone for SYNC is not set to off.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.

SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.

Possible cell phone malfunction.

Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again.

Try pushing your phonebook contacts to

SYNC by selecting the option to add.

You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

334

SYNC™

Issue

The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my

SYNC phonebook is empty or is missing contacts.

Cell phone issues

Possible cause

Limitations on your cell phone's capability.

Possible solution

Try pushing your phonebook contacts to

SYNC by selecting the option to add.

If the missing contacts are stored on your

SIM card, try moving them to your cell phone's memory.

Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact.

You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.

I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to

SYNC.

Possible cell phone malfunction.

Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again.

Try deleting your device from SYNC and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again.

Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC

Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.

Update your cell phone's firmware.

Switch off the auto download setting.

Text messaging is not working on SYNC.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Possible cell phone malfunction.

iPhone

Check your cell phone's compatibility.

Try switching off your cell phone, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again.

• Go to your cell phone's Settings.

• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.

• Make sure the connection status shows

Not Connected.

• Press the blue circle to enter the next menu.

• Turn on Show Notifications.

• Turn on Sync Contacts.

335

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Issue

Audible text messages do not work on my cell phone.

Cell phone issues

Possible cause Possible solution

Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to SYNC.

Repeat these steps for every other Sync vehicle you are connected to.

Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC if it is unlocked.

Replying to text messages using SYNC is not supported by iPhone.

Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported.

Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Access the text messaging menu of SYNC to see if your cell phone supports the feature. Press the PHONE button and then scroll and select the option for text messaging, then press OK .

This is a cell phone limitation.

Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider and software version.

Issue

I am having trouble connecting my device.

USB and media issues

Possible cause Possible solution

Try switching off the device, resetting it or removing the battery, then trying again.

Possible device malfunction.

Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.

Make sure correctly insert the USB cable to the device and your vehicle's USB port.

Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings.

336

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™

Issue

USB and media issues

Possible cause Possible solution

SYNC does not recognize my device when I start my vehicle.

This is a device limitation.

Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures.

Bluetooth audio does not stream.

This is a devicedependent feature.

The device is not connected.

Make sure you connect the device to SYNC and press play on your device.

Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information.

SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device.

The file may be corrupted.

Make sure that all song details are populated.

Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.

The song may have copyright protection that does not allow it to play.

Some devices require you to change the

USB settings from mass storage to media transfer protocol class.

When I connect my iPhone or iPod Touch through the

USB and

Bluetooth Audio at the same time, I sometimes do not hear any sound.

From the iPhone or iPod Touch music now playing screen, select the audio device airplay icon at the very bottom of your iPhone or iPod Touch screen.

This is a device limitation.

To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch through Bluetooth Audio, select SYNC.

To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch through USB, select Dock Connector.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

337

SYNC™

Issue

SYNC does not understand what I am saying.

SYNC does not understand the name of a song or artist.

Voice command issues

Possible cause Possible solution

You may be using the wrong voice commands.

Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections.

Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there.

You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time.

The microphone for the system is either in your rear view mirror or in the headliner just above the windshield.

You may be using the wrong voice commands.

Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media section.

Say the song or artist exactly as the system saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New

Power Generation.

You may not be saying the name exactly as the system saved it.

Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer

Nettles".

If the song titles are in capital letters, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to say "L-O-L-A".

The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it.

Do not use special characters in the title, as the system does not recognize them.

SYNC does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call.

You may be using the wrong voice commands.

Review the cell phone voice commands at the beginning of the cell phone section.

You can also use the cell phone and media suggestion lists to get a list of possible suggestions when the system cannot fully

understand you. See Using Voice Recognition (page 305).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

338

SYNC™

Issue

The SYNC voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign names stored on my cell phone.

Voice command issues

Possible cause

You may not be saying the name exactly as the system saved it.

Possible solution

Make sure you are saying the name exactly as the system saved it. For example, if the contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe

Wilson".

The system works better if you list full names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than

"Joe".

Contacts in your phonebook may be very short and similar or they may contain special characters.

Your phonebook contacts may be in capital letters.

Do not use special characters such as 123 or ICE as the system does not recognize them.

You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC.

If the contacts are in capital letters, you have to spell them. JAKE requires you to say "Call J-A-K-E".

SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone.

Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE . Select the option for phonebook and then contact name.

Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting.

The SYNC voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist names from my media player or USB flash drive.

You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC.

SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example,

U2) such that you can always use the

English pronunciation for these artists.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

339

SYNC™

Issue

The system generates voice prompts and the pronunciation of some words may not be accurate for my language.

Voice command issues

Possible cause

SYNC uses text-tospeech voice prompt technology.

Possible solution

SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice.

SYNC offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages.

Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example," play artist Madonna).

My previous

Bluetooth voice control system allowed me to control the radio, CD, and climate control systems. Why can I not control these systems with SYNC?

The focus of SYNC is to control your mobile devices and the content stored on them.

SYNC offers significant capability beyond the previous system such as dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call

John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, " play artist

Madonna).

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

340

SYNC™

General

Issue Possible cause Possible solution

The language selected for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display does not match the

SYNC language

(phone, USB,

Bluetooth audio, voice control and voice prompts).

SYNC does not support the currently selected language for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display.

SYNC only supports four languages in a single module for text display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC remains in the current active language.

SYNC offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

341

SYNC™

Issue

AppLink issues

Possible cause(s)

AppLink Mobile

Applications:

When I select

"Find New

Apps," SYNC does not find any applications.

An AppLink capable phone is not connected to SYNC.

My phone is connected, but

I still cannot find any apps.

AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and running on your mobile device.

My phone is connected, my app(s) are running, but I still cannot find any apps.

Sometime apps do not properly close and reopen their connection to

SYNC, over ignition cycles, for example.

Possible solution(s)

Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.

Additionally, ensure your phone is paired and connected to SYNC in order to find

AppLink-capable apps on your device.

iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's

USB port with an Apple USB cable.

Ensure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of the app from your phone's app store. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone.

Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually

"Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings menu, selecting 'Apps.' then finding the particular app and choosing 'Force stop.' Don't forget to restart the app afterwards, then select "Find New

Apps" on SYNC.

On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile

App's Menu.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

342

SYNC™

Issue

AppLink issues

Possible cause(s)

My iPhone phone is connected, my app is running, I restarted the app but I still cannot find it on

SYNC.

The USB connection to

SYNC may need to be reset.

Possible solution(s)

My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps.

There is a bluetooth bug on some order versions of the Android OS that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off bluetooth.

Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button.

Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should appear in SYNC's Mobile Apps

Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it.

I have an

Android phone.

I found and started my media app on

SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low.

The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low.

Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device.

I can only see some of the

AppLink apps running on my phone listed in

SYNC's Mobile

Apps Menu.

Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can use to connect. If you have more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of availble

Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu.

Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford

SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

343

GENERAL INFORMATION

SYNC™ 2

WARNING

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Item

Phone

Navigation

Climate

Settings

Message

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

344

Item Message

Home

Information

Entertainment

SYNC™ 2

This system uses a four-corner strategy to provide quick access to several vehicle features and settings. The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone, multimedia, climate control and navigation system. The corners display any active modes within those menus, such as phone status or the climate temperature.

Note: Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving.

Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open).

PHONE

Press to select any of the following:

Message

Phone

Quick Dial

Phonebook

History

Messaging

Settings

NAVIGATION

Press to select any of the following:

Message

My Home

Favorites

Previous Destinations

Point of Interest

Emergency

Street Address

Message

Intersection

City Center

Latitude/Longitude

Edit Route

Cancel Route

CLIMATE

Press the corresponding icons to control the following options:

• Driver Settings.

• Recirculated Air.

• Auto.

• Dual.

• Passenger Settings.

• A/C.

• Defrost.

SETTINGS

Press to select any of the following:

Message

Clock

Display

Sound

Vehicle

Settings

Help

345

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™ 2

HOME

Press to access your home screen. Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software, your screens may vary in appearance from the descriptions in this section. Your features may also be limited depending on your market. Check with an authorized dealer for availability.

INFORMATION

ENTERTAINMENT

Press to select any of the following:

Message

DAB

USB

BT Stereo

SD Card

Line In

If equipped.

Press to select any of the following:

Message

Traffic

Alerts

Calendar

Apps

Where Am I?

Using the Audio Controls

Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:

Menu Item Action and Description

Power

Vol:

Switch the media features on or off.

Adjust the volume of playing media.

Seek

Tune

Eject

Display

Source

Use as you normally would in media modes.

Eject a CD from the entertainment system.

Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again, or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.

Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media modes.

346

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™ 2

Sound

Menu Item

Using the Steering Wheel Controls

Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use your steering wheel controls to interact with the touchscreen system.

• VOL: Control the volume of audio output.

• Mute: Mute the audio output.

• Voice: Press to start a voice session.

Press again and hold to end a voice session.

• SEEK and PHONE ACCEPT:

• While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets or press and hold to seek between stations.

• While in USB or CD mode, press to seek between stations or press and hold to fast seek.

• While in phone mode, press to answer a call, or to switch between calls.

Action and Description

Adjust the settings for:

Bass

Treble

Midrange

Set Balance and Fade

DSP

EQ Mode

Speed Compensated Volume

• SEEK and PHONE REJECT:

• While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets or press and hold to seek between stations.

• While in USB or CD mode, press to seek between stations or press and hold to fast seek.

• While in phone mode, press to end a call, or to reject an incoming call.

• Source: Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media modes.

• Sound: Touch the control to adjust the

sound settings. See Settings (page

351).

See Steering Wheel (page 56).

Cleaning the Touchscreen Display

Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display.

Support

For further support, contact an authorized dealer. For more information, visit the regional Ford website.

347

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

SYNC™ 2

Safety Information

WARNING

Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

• Do not attempt to service or repair the system. Have an authorized dealer check your vehicle.

• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's user guide for further information.

• For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 5 mph (8 km/h).

Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC.

Speed-restricted Features

Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary.

See the following chart for more specific examples.

System Functionality

Restricted Features

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.

Videos, Photos and Graphics Playing video.

Text Messages Composing text messages.

Navigation

Editing preset text messages.

Demo navigation route.

Galaxy / S-MAX (CDR) , CG3646en enGBR, Edition date: 01/2015, First Printing

348

SYNC™ 2

Privacy Information

When a cell phone connects to SYNC, the system creates a profile that links to that cell phone. The system creates the profile to offer you more mobile features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your phonebook, text messages (read and unread) and call history. This includes the history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. If you connect a media player, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately

10 minutes of all recent system activity.

Use the log profile and other system data to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur.

The cell phone profile, media player index and development log remain in the system unless deleted. They are generally accessible in your vehicle only when you connect your cell phone or media player.

If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you complete a master reset to erase all stored

information. See Information Displays